2007 acura tl online reference owner's...

2007 Acura TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................3 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 125 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 233What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 245 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 271 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 311 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 335 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 351A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 355 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe 2007 Acura TL. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SEPC30.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０６／０８／１８　２０：４８：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００１　

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Acura TL was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Introduction

i

０６／０８／１８　２０：４８：３９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devicesrecord front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbagsystem component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legallyrequired or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked tothe vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

ii

０６／０８／１８　２０：４８：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００３　

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０６／０８／１８　２０：４８：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００４　

Vehicle with navigation system shown

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER DOORLOCKS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AIRBAGS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

MIRROR CONTROLS

CLOCK

(P.108)

(P.96)

(P.112)

(P.97)

(P.107) (P.9, 24)

(P.116)

(P.126)

(P. 250)

(P. 253)

(P.237)(P.235)

(P.133)

０６／０８／１８　２０：４９：３０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００８　

＊

＊ To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

CRUISECONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLBUTTONS

HORN

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

(P.89)

(P.107) (P.181)STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT (P.91)

(P.86, 89)(P.85)

(P.90)

(P.90)

(P.184)

(P.111)HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS (P.190)

(P.265)

TM

０６／０８／１８　２０：４９：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 16.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 20

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 21Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 22......Airbag System Components . 22

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How The Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 33

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 33

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 34

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 36

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 36

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 39.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

...............................With LATCH . 43.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45

..............................With a Tether . 46...........Protecting Larger Children . 48

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 48..................Using a Booster Seat . 49

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 50

...Additional Safety Precautions . 51.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

...................................Safety Labels . 53

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０６／０８／１８　２０：４９：４０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

14

48 51

278

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

０６／０８／１８　２０：４９：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(1)(4)(3)

(7)

(2)(6)

(5)

(2)

(8) (10) (9)

(9)

(8)(11)

(7)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats and Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column

(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Side Curtain Airbags

(10) Door Locks

(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

０６／０８／１８　２０：４９：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers. Seat belts are the single most

effective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side and rear impacts, androllovers.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wearyour seat belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：０６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１３　

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).24

27

CONTINUED


What You Should Do:

Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１４　

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

29


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１５　

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front seat.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and trunkare closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door and trunkopen monitor on the multi-information display to indicate whena specific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.

33 37

96

Protecting Adults and Teens

Close and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１６　

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out and up anddown (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have your front passenger adjusttheir seat as far to the rear aspossible.

91

103


Adjust the Front Seats2.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：３８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１７　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.103

CONTINUED


Adjust the Head RestraintsAdjust the Seat-Backs 4.3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：４８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１８　

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

104


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５０：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００１９　

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

18

CONTINUED


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：０２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２０　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：０８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２１　

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.Two people should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２２　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

26 27

68

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

18

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２３　

CONTINUED

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

45

14

Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２４　

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags toinflate.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


20

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：３８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２５　

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a limited warranty onseat belts. See your

booklet for details.

299

Acura WarrantyInformation

Seat Belt Maintenance


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularly,and have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２６　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

24

27

29

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

22

(1) (2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)(9)

(6) (7)

(8)

(10)

(5)

(4)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

０６／０８／１８　２０：５１：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２７　

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latched orunlatched (see page ).

Sensors that monitor the weighton the front passenger’s seat. Ifthe weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg)or less (the weight of an infant orsmall child), the passenger’s frontairbag will be turned off (see page

).

18

20

28

26

26

30

29

30


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２８　

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 26

How Your Front Airbags Work


24

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：０８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００２９　

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

CONTINUED

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

Dual-Threshold Airbags

latched

less severe

not latched


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３０　

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

Advanced Airbags


26

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３１　

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against cargo on theseat or floor behind it.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on that side of the vehicle.

30

300

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３２　

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if thesensors in the seat detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

30Side Airbag Cutoff System


28

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：４２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３３　

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０６／０８／１８　２０：５２：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３４　

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

60

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not mean


30

CanadaU. S.

CanadaU. S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３５　

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

CONTINUED


Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：１０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３６　

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.


32

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３７　

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

38 4748 51

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３８　

－

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

48

30 Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


34

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００３９　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４０　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

48

16

14

103

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


36

０６／０８／１８　２０：５３：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４１　

－


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

45 46

98

98


Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：０２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４２　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

38

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：１０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４３　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

26

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４４　

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.


40

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４５　

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerrear seats.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４６　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

42

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４７　

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated with a small button abovethe anchor point.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

MARKS

Ripid typeLOWER ANCHORS

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：４７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４８　

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

4.

5.

6.

7.

104


44

Flexible type

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５４：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００４９　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５０　

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


46

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINT

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５１　

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the legs of the headrestraint.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 in theprevious column.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

45 45

Using the Center AnchorUsing an Outer Anchor


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

TETHER STRAPHOOK

COVER

ANCHOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５２　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

48

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５３　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

3.

4.

5.

34

CONTINUED

Using a Booster Seat


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５４　

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout the ride.

14 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


50

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５５　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：４９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５６　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk lid open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

52

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５５：５６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５７　

CONTINUED

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your dealer for areplacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

HOOD

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：１４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５８　

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

54

SUN VISORDOORJAMB

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００５９　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58.............................................Gauges . 65

...................Temperature Gauge . 65..................................Fuel Gauge . 65

.............Multi-Information Display . 66......Controls Near Steering Wheel . 84

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 85...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 86

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 88

............Daytime Running Lights . 88........................................Fog Lights . 89

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 89.................Hazard Warning Button . 90.................Rear Window Defogger . 90

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 91..................................................Keys . 92

........................Immobilizer System . 94................................Ignition Switch . 95

......................................Door Locks . 96................................................Trunk . 97

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 98..................Childproof Door Locks . 98

.......................Remote Transmitter . 99

...............................................Seats . 103..........Trunk Pass-through Cover . 105

...........................................Mirrors . 106Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 108..................................Seat Heaters . 111

............................Power Windows . 112.......................................Moonroof . 115

..............................................Clock . 116...............................Parking Brake . 117...............................Interior Lights . 118

.........Interior Convenience Items . 119.....................Beverage Holders . 120

........Accessory Power Sockets . 120..................................Glove Box . 121

.............Console Compartment . 121...............................Coin Holder . 122

..................Front Door Pockets . 122............................Vanity Mirror . 123

...................................Sun Visor . 123

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６０　

Vehicle with navigation system shown

Control Locations

56

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY

POWER DOOR LOCKS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CLOCK

(P.108)

(P.96)

(P.112)

(P.107)(P.116)

(P.97)

(P.235) (P.237)

(P.126)

(P.133)

(P.250)

(P.253)

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６１　

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.63)

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT INDICATOR

MESSAGEINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.59, 325)

(P.63)

(P.59)

(P.61)

(P.61)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.59)

(P.64)

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY (P.66)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.60)

(P.64)

(P.59)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.60)

(P.60)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.61)

(P.62)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：４５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６２　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

68

18

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

58

０６／０８／１８　２０：５６：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６３　

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator has two functions:

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It is a reminder tocheck the parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

1.

2.

324

324

325

326

68


Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

CanadaU.S.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６４　

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, automatic seat belttensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

29

30

262

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator


60

U. S. Canada

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６５　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

1.

2.

3.

264

264

264

184

184

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６６　

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

294

86

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator


62

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６７　

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 1.2 U.S. gal(4.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the needle reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the needle doesreach E.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled. (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

94

68

86

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Low Fuel Indicator Fog Light Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６８　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure. You will also see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The multi-informationdisplay will show you which tire haslost the pressure and how muchpressure it has lost (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

268

313

266

6668

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Message Indicator


64

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００６９　

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine’scooling system.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. Drivinguphill or making turns can cause theneedle to fluctuate or the low fuelindicator to come on early. Theneedle returns to the bottom afteryou turn off the ignition.

322

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

TEMPERATURE GAUGETACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could causethe engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７０　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display.

To change the display, press theINFO ( / ) button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the mainmenu appears (see page ).

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown on page

each time you press the INFO( / ) button or SEL/RESETbutton.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

69

69

68

77

Multi-Information Display

66

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO BUTTONS

０６／０８／１８　２０：５７：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７１　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the parkingbrake is not fully released or a dooris not fully closed, the multi-information display will show you theproblem. It does this by interruptingthe current display with one or moremessages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message indicator comes onfor the first time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To cancel the message(s) before 5seconds elapsed, press the INFO( / ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / )button, some messages stay on orcome on again at regular intervalsuntil the problem is corrected.

Here is a list of all messages:

CONTINUED


System Messages

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７２　

See page11

See pages18, 58

See pages18, 58

See page59

See page59

See page268

See page269

See page236

See page63

See page287

See page249

See page274


68

U.S.

CanadaCanada only

AT model only

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７３　


Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Main Menu

０６／０８／１９　１１：２１：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７４　

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.Switch between Trip A and Trip B bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.


Odometer Trip Meter

70

SEL/RESET BUTTON

０６／０８／１９　１９：４４：２８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７５　

－－－－－－－－

± ±

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the SEL/RESETbutton for 10 seconds. The followingsequence will appear for 1 secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2,1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Outside Temperature


Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

U.S.

Canada

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７６　

▼

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .

The language of the multi-information display is selectable. Theselectable languages are English,French, and Spanish.

To select a language, display‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’ Pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaywill change as shown above.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( ) button, thenenter your selection by pressing theSEL/RESET button.

273


Engine Oil Life Language Selection

72

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７７　

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching your cellphone.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls, orvisit the handsfreelink.com website.

When the multi-information displayis in the trip computer mode,pressing the SEL/RESET buttonchanges the display as shown in thenext column.

190

CONTINUED


HandsFreeLink Trip Computer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

TM

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７８　

▼

The messages in this displayindicate:

When you press the INFO ( )button, the display changes as shownabove. This is the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles (kilometers), so it will varywith changes in speed, traffic, etc. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.

TIME: Time traveled

To reset the values in the tripcomputer, press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the values reset.

AVG MPG (U.S. models)/AVGL/100 KM (Canadian models):Average fuel economy

AVG MPH (U.S. models)/AVGkm/h (Canadian models): Averagevehicle speed

DISTANCE: Distance traveled


74

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０６／０８／１８　２０：５８：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００７９　

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) is functioningnormally and the tires are properlyinflated, you will see the abovedisplay on the multi-informationdisplay as it cycles through its mainmenu.

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

If one or more of your vehicle tiresare low on pressure, you will see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message in the display.If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message.


Tire Pressure Monitor

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

U.S.

Canada

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８０　

See page 266 through 270 for moreinformation.

When the main menu displays"Keyless Memory Settings, " youcan customize some of the vehiclecontrol settings to your preference.

To change the settings, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position, and the vehicle must bestopped with the transmission inPark (A/T) or the parking brake set(M/T).

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,customizing is not possible.


Keyless Memory Settings

76

AT model

MT model

TM

TM

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：１４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８１　

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊＊

Seteup CategoryDOOR SETUP

PageP.79

P.80

P.80

P.81

P.81

Menu ItemAUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK (AT)

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK (MT)

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCKMODEKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

Setting OptionSHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPDOFFSHIFT TO PDRIVER DOORSHIFT TO PALL DOORSIGN OFFDRIVER DOORIGN OFFALL DOORSOFFIGN OFFDRIVER DOORIGN OFFALL DOORSOFF

ALL DOORSBEEP ONBEEP OFF

DescriptionChanges the setting of when to automatically lock thedoors

Changes the setting of when to automatically unlockthe driver’s/all the doors.

Changes the setting of when to automatically unlockthe driver’s/all doors.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter when the button is first pushedThe exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also soundwhen you press the LOCK button twice.

: Automatic transmission model only: Default setting

CONTINUED

DRIVER’S DOOR


Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

０６／０８／１９　１１：２１：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８２　

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

Menu ItemSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME

Seteup CategoryDOOR SET UP

LIGHTING SETUP

DEFAULT ALL

PageP.81

P.82

P.83

P.83

DescriptionChanges how long it takes (in seconds) for the doorsto relock and the security system to set after youunlock but do not open the door.Changes how long (in seconds) the headlights stay onafter you close the driver’s door.

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stayon after you close the doors.

Changes all the customized settings as default.

Setting Option30 sec60 sec90 sec0 sec15 sec30 sec60 sec5 sec15 sec30 secSETCANCEL

: Default setting


78

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８３　

▼

To enter the customizing mode,press the SEL/RESET button while‘‘Keyless Memory Setting ’’ isdisplayed. The display will change asshown above.

The first Keyless Memory Setting isAuto Door Lock.

Select the desired condition bymoving the pointer with the INFO( ) button and enter your selectionby pressing the SEL/RESET button.

OFF: The auto door lock isdeactivated all the time.

There are two (manualtransmission) or three (automatictransmission) possible settings:

15 km/h: The doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h.

10 mph: The doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 10 mph.

SHIFT FROM P: The doors will lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of P. (Models with automatictransmission.)

Auto Door Lock

On Canadian models

On U.S. models

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

U.S.

Canada

(AT) (MT)

(AT) (MT)

TM

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８４　

▼

▼

▼

Auto Door Unlock

On models with automatic transmission On models with manual transmissionSelect the desired condition bymoving the pointer with the INFO( ) button and enter your selectionby pressing the SEL/RESET button.

To designate the door(s) that unlockunder the previous step, select‘‘DRVR DR’’ or ‘‘ALL DRS’’ bymoving the pointer with the INFO( ) button and enter your selectionby pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Select the condition and door(s) tounlock by moving the pointer withINFO ( ) button and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

There are five possible settings forautomatic transmission models andthree possible settings for manualtransmission models.

SHIFT TO P: The driver’s door or alldoors depending on your selection inthe next step, will unlock wheneveryou move the shift lever to P(Models with automatictransmission).

IGN OFF: The driver’s door or alldoors unlock when you turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.

OFF: The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.


80

(AT) (MT)

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８５　

▼

▼

Security Relock TimerKeyless Lock AcknowledgmentKey and Remote Unlock ModeIf you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou lock the doors with the remotetransmitter, a beeper will sound toverify that doors are locked and thesecurity system has set.

If you do not want the beeper tosound, select ‘‘BEEP OFF’’ with theINFO ( ) button and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

You can select whether the driver’sdoor or all the doors unlock whenyou press the unlock button on theremote transmitter first time.

Select the desired setting ‘‘DRIVERDOOR’’ or ‘‘ALL DOORS’’ bypressing the INFO ( ) button andenter your selection by pressing theSEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０６／０８／１８　２０：５９：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８６　

▼ ▼

Select the desired relock time bymoving the pointer with the INFO( ) button and enter your selectionby pressing the SEL/RESET button.

The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights go off after the selectedtime when you close the driver’sdoor.

You can change how long the lightsstay on before they go off asdescribed next.

Select the desired time (‘‘0s, 15s, 30sor 60s’’) by moving the pointer withthe INFO ( ) button and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Headlight Auto Off Timer


82

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８７　

▼▼

▲ ▼

▼

Interior Light Dimming Time Default All

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors (see page ). Selecthow long it takes for the interiorlights to fade out (in seconds) from‘‘5s, 15s, or 30s’’ by moving thepointer with the INFO ( ) button.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,display the menu shown above.Select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ by movingthe pointer with the INFO ( )button and enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

Enter your selection by pressing theSEL/RESET button.

If you select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ thedisplay changes as shown. Press theINFO ( / ) button to cancel‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ or press the SEL/RESET button to confirm yourselection is ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’To exit ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ without

changing the current settings, select‘‘EXIT’’ by moving the pointer withthe INFO ( ) button and enter your

selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.118


Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８８　

＊

＊ To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

84

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

HORN

MIRROR CONTROLS STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

(P.89)

(P.265)

(P.107)(P.91)

(P.85)(P.90)

(P.90)

(P.184)

(P.111)

(P.181) (P.191)

(P.86, 89)

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００８９　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wiper speedwill increase to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９０　

－

－－

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turn SignalOffParking and instrument panelAUTOHeadlights onFog lights offFog lights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Turning switch to the‘‘ ’’ position turns on the parkinglights, taillights, instrument panellights, side-marker lights, and rearlicense plate lights. Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the headlights. If you leave thelights on with the key removed fromthe ignition switch, you will hear areminder tone when you open thedriver’s door.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull it back toreturn to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

62

Turn Signal

HeadlightsHigh Beams

Turn Signals and Headlights

86

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：３０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９１　

－

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). Thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto .

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time. The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights when itsenses low ambient light.

CONTINUED


AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

LIGHT SENSOR

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９２　

To change the "HEA DLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER" setting, see page 82.

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position, remove the key, then openand close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights turn off after10 minutes.

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

With the headlight switch off, thedaytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and release theparking brake. They remain on untilyou turn the ignition off, even if youset the parking brake.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights


88

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９３　

－＋＋－

Adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel by pressing theor side of the adjustment button.Press to increase the brightnessand to decrease it. You can adjustthe brightness with the headlightswitch on or off.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Pressing the MAXbutton will bring it to the maximumlevel.If your vehicle is equipped with thenavigation system, the navigationsystem screen will also go to fullbrightness. This can be helpful whenusing the headlights during daylighthours.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

MAX BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９４　

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. The indicator in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

90

０６／０８／１８　２１：００：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９５　

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

To adjust the steering wheel:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicators.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９６　

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

The valet key works only in theignition and the driver’s door lock.You can keep the trunk pass-throughcover and the glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your key. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly an Acura-approved key blank.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Protect the key from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

Keys

92

KEY NUMBERTAG

VALETKEY(GRAY)

MASTERKEY

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：１３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９７　

Always make sure the key is fullyextended when you insert it to theignition switch. If the key is not fullyextended the immobilizer systemmay not operate properly andprevent the engine from starting.

The key may come in contact withyour finger while being retracted orextended. Make sure your fingers donot touch the pivot of the key whenretracting or extending it.

The master key can be retracted intothe remote transmitter. To use thekey, push the release button. Thekey should be fully extended. Toretract the key, push the releasebutton and at the same time push thekey into the remote transmitter untilit is securely latched.

Retractable Master Key

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Push

RELEASE BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９８　

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

94

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　００９９　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, you must push thekey in slightly. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：３３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１００　

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the bottom ofthe switch to lock the doors and thetop to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock. When youpush down the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, all the doors lock.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn it,and then release it. The remainingdoors unlock when you turn the keya second time within a few seconds.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. If you tryto lock an open driver’s door bypushing in the lock tab, all doors willunlock when you close the driver’sdoor.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, push the lock tab down,and close the door.

Lockout Prevention

Door Locks

96

０６／０８／１９　１１：２１：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０１　

To open the trunk, press the trunkrelease button on the left corner ofthe dashboard. To open the trunkfrom the outside, press the trunkrelease button on the remotetransmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead oris disconnected, you can open thetrunk from the rear seat by pullingthe trunk release handle. Reach thehandle through the trunk pass-through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release buttonon the dashboard by turning off thetrunk main switch in the glove box,locking the glove box, and lockingthe trunk pass-through cover withthe master key.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

52Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

ON

OFF

０６／０８／１９　１１：２１：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０２　

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .37

Emergency Trunk Opener Childproof Door Locks

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks

98

Lock

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：５３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０３　

－

－

－

－

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany doors within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets. To change thissetting, refer to Keyless MemorySettings on page .

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door or all thedoors (depending on the keylessmemory setting). Press it twice tounlock the other doors. Someexterior lights will flash twice eachtime you press the button.The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany doors within 30 seconds (orwhatever setting the relock timer isset to), the light fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds (dependingon the keyless memory setting), youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and the securitysystem has set. You cannot lock thedoors if any door is not fully closedor if the key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

81

UNLOCK

LOCK

TRUNK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKBUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０１：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０４　

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the keypad from thetransmitter by pushing any buttonfrom outside.

Battery type: CR1616

1.

2.

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

100

KEYPADSCREW

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０５　

－

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the keypad.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad,then install the parts in reverseorder.Place a cloth on the edge of the

keypad, and remove the upper halfby carefully prying on the edgewith a small flat-tip screwdriver orcoin.

4.

5.

3.




Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

BATTERY

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０６　

Customized settings(see page ).

Driving position memory(see page ).

When you unlock the driver’s doorwith a remote, that remote’s keylessmemory settings are activated.Depending on which remote wasused, a WELCOME DRIVER 1 orWELCOME DRIVER 2 messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. The driver’s ID (MEMORY1 or MEMORY 2) is printed on theback of each remote.

Here are the settings activated bythe remote;

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remote, thedriver’s seat (except power lumbar)and outside mirrors move to thepositions stored in memory. Anindicator on one of the drivingposition memory buttons also comeson.

To turn off this feature, press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons at the same time. The LEDin the remote will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons. Doing thiscancels the keyless memory settingsfor that remote and restores thedefault settings.

To turn the keyless memory settingsback on, repeat this procedure. TheLED will blink once to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

77

108

Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter

102

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：２４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０７　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 13

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switch onthe driver’s seat adjusts the seatbottom in several directions. On thepassenger’s seat, the long horizontalswitch moves the seat only back andforth. The short vertical switchadjusts the seat back angle.

The short horizontal switch on thedriver’s seat adjusts the degree oflumbar support.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s seat only)

Moves the front of theseat up or down. (Driver’sseat only)

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.(Driver’s seat only)

Raises or lowers the seat.(Driver’s seat only)

Front Seat Power Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

PASSENGER’S SEATDRIVER’S SEAT

０６／０８／１９　１７：３０：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０８　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

13

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

All head restraints adjust for height.The tilt of the front head restraints isalso adjustable. You need both handsto adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown. To adjust the tilt, pivot thefront head restraint to the desiredposition.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

Head Restraints Armrest

Seats

104

RELEASE BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１０９　

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key, and turn it clockwise.

52Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Seats, Trunk Pass-through Cover

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

KNOB

COVER

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１０　

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Mirrors

106

SENSOR INDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０２：５６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１１　

There is a sensor on the back of the mirror. Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and affect its performance.

－

－

－The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, move the selectorswitch to the L (driver’s side), or R(passenger’s side).

Push the edge of the adjustmentswitch to move the mirror right,left, up, or down.

When finished, move the selectorswitch back to the center (off)position.

Left position the driver’s sidemirror tilts.

Right position the passenger’sside mirror tilts down.

Center position the tilt-downfeature is inactive.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

3.

1.

2.108

When the gear selector is moved to R(reverse) and the selector switch in the:

Power Mirror HeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

HEATED MIRROR BUTTONSELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENTSWITCH

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１２　

Two seat and outside mirrorpositions can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Press and release the MEMObutton on the driver’s door. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

3.

1.

2.

107

103

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

108

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：１２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１３　

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjust the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the parking brake is set(M/T) or the shift lever is in Park(A/T).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

You cannot select a memorizedposition if the transmission is inreverse. Shift to another gear,then select a position.

1.

2.

Notes for vehicles with M/T

CONTINUED

Selecting a Memorized Position


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

MEMORY BUTTONS

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：２２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１４　

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Shift out of Park (automatictransmission), or into reverse(manual transmission).

Adjust the outside mirrors.


110

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１５　

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag off system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe HI side of the switch to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,push the LO side of the switch. Thiswill keep the seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：３３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１６　

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open the passenger’s window,push down on the appropriate switchand hold it until the window reachesthe desired position. To close thewindow, pull back on the windowswitch. Release the switch when thewindow gets to the position you want.

To open either frontwindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

AUTO

Power Windows

112

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAINSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：３８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１７　

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or a frontwindow fuse is removed, the AUTOfunction is disabled. The powerwindow system needs to be resetafter reconnecting the battery orinstalling the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the front window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull and hold the front windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If either front window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To close either front window fully,pull back the window switch firmlyto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goes allthe way up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

1.

2.

Auto Reverse

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

０６／０８／１８　２１：０３：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１８　

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote transmitter.

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the key in thedriver’s door lock.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows andmoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:

To open the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

NOTE: If the windows and moonroofstop before the desired position,repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andthe moonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To close:

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows and moonroof startto open. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the button.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again and hold it. If thewindows and the moonroof stopbefore the desired position, repeatsteps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

2.

3.

4.

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Power Windows

114

UNLOCK BUTTON

Close

Open

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１１９　

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.Make sure everyone’s hands are

away from the moonroof beforeopening or closing it.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardthe moonroof switch lightly and holdit. The moonroof will stop when yourelease the switch.

To tilt the moonroof, press straightup on the center of the switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting fullyopen, press the switch a second time.

To slide the moonroof open, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof automatically opensall the way. To stop the moonrooffrom opening fully, push the switchforward briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe switch firmly forward. Themoonroof automatically closes all theway. To stop the moonroof fromclosing fully, pull back the switchbriefly.

CONTINUED

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２０　

Change the hour by pressing andholding the H button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing andholding the M button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the Rbutton to set the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The clock is set automatically.

The clock displays the time with theignition switch in the ON (II)position. If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to reset the clock.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.114

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Clock

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

Moonroof, Clock

116

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：１９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２１　

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).59

Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２２　

The front ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF.

When neither side is pushed in(Door Activated), the lights come onwhen you:

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly,both front and rear ceiling lightsfade out in 5, 15, or 30 secondsdepending on your custom setting(see page ).

Both front and rear ceiling lightswork as individual map lights. Toturn a map light on or off, press itslens. You can use the front maplights regardless of the position ofthe front ceiling light switch.

With the front ceiling light switch inthe OFF position, the rear map lightsdo not work, and the interior lightsdo not come on when you open adoor.

When the ‘‘ ’’ side is pushed in,the lights are off all the time.

When the ‘‘ ’’ side of the switchis pushed in, both front and rearceiling lights are ON all the time.

83

Ceiling Light

Interior Lights

118

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２３　

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENTFRONT DOOR POCKET

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

SEAT-BACK POCKETSACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２４　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.

The rear beverage holder is in therear seat armrest. Open thebeverage holder by pushing the frontof it, and pulling the holder all theway out.

There are two accessory powersockets. One is in the front of thecenter console under the utilitypocket lid. The other is under thearmrest in the console compartmentstorage area.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Accessory Power SocketsBeverage Holders


120

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２５　

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

To open the console compartmentstorage area, pull up on the left lever,and lift the armrest. To close, lowerthe armrest, and push it down until itlatches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theright lever and lift up the armrest.

Glove Box Console Compartment


Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：４９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２６　

The interior of each front door hasan extendable pocket for maps andother small, lightweight items. Eachpocket also has a sunglasses holder.You can remove the sunglassesholder to make more room in thepocket.

The coin holder inside the consolecompartment is removable. Toremove it, pull it up. The coin holdercan also be stored in either frontdoor pocket.

Front Door PocketsCoin Holder


122

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

０６／０８／１８　２１：０４：５５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２７　

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out. In thisposition, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Each sun visor has a vanity mirror onthe back of it. To use a vanity mirror,pull up the cover. The light come onwhen you open the cover.

Vanity Mirror Sun Visor

Interior Convenience Item

Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

SUN VISOR

Slide

０６／０８／１８　２１：０５：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１２８　

The climate control systems in yourvehicle provide a comfortable drivingenvironment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 126.............................Airflow Buttons . 128.............................Climate Control . 131

................................Audio System . 133Audio System (Models without

..............Navigation System) . 134......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 135

Playing the XM Satellite......................................Radio . 139

...Operating the Disc Changer . 145...........................Playing a Tape . 152

Audio System (Models with..............Navigation System) . 155...............Voice Control System . 155

......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 156Playing the XM Satellite

......................................Radio . 159...Operating the Disc Changer . 165

...........................Playing a Tape . 173...Disc Changer Error Messages . 176

..................Protecting Your Discs . 177............AM/FM Radio Reception . 178

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 180................Remote Audio Controls . 181.................Radio Theft Protection . 182

............................Security System . 183

...............................Cruise Control . 184HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 187.............................HandsFreeLink . 190

......................................AcuraLink . 217.........................................Compass . 228

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 231

Features

Features

125

０６／０８／１９　１７：３０：４０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３０　

Vents, Heating, and A/C

126

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON


Vehicles without navigation system

０６／０８／１８　２１：０５：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３１　


Features

127

OFF BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON


FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDEMODE CONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE DISPLAY PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTON

Vehicles with navigation system

０６／０８／１８　２１：０５：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３２　

▲

▼

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior isrecirculated throughout the system.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

The driver’s side temperature andpassenger’s side temperature can beset separately. Press either side’sbutton to increase the temperatureof airflow. Press either side’sbutton to decrease it. When you setthe temperature to its lower limit orits upper limit, it will be displayed as‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. The A/CON indicator comes on in the displaywhen the A/C is on.

The climate control system in yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See thenavigation section in your quick startguide for an overview of this systemand the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Press the button to increase thefan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

90

Only on models with navigation system

Airflow Buttons

Voice Control System Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Temperature Control Buttons

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonFan Control Buttons

128

０６／０８／１９　１７：３０：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３３　

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.In this case, you cannot turn the A/Coff.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control buttons.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Set the temperature to maximum.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

You can set the temperatures andmodes for the driver’s side and thepassenger’s side separately whenthis button is pressed (indicator on).When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature andmode with the driver’s side

temperature control buttons andmode control button.

When is selected, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

The driver’s side mode andpassenger’s side mode can beselected separately when the dualbutton is pressed. However, when

is selected on the driver’sside, mode selection on thepassenger’s side is not possible.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.


Mode Control Button

Using the Heater

Ventilation

Dual Button

Features

129

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：０８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３４　

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

To remove fog from inside thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, oron high for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/C ON

indicator will not come on, if it waspreviously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.This helps to dehumidify the air andto defog the windshield. In eithermode, you cannot turn off the A/C.When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its original setting,either on or off, as displayed by theA/C ON or A/C OFF indicator.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton.Set the temperature to the desiredlevel. For quick cooling set thetemperature to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

66 4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

If the interior is very warm,


Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C

To Defog and Defrost

130

０６／０８／１９　１８：０９：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３５　

When the AUTO button on thedriver’s side is pressed, thetemperature control buttons on thepassenger’s side are disabled, andthe interior temperature is regulatedto the temperature set on the driver’sside. When the AUTO button on thepassenger’s side is pressed,temperature can be set on the driver’sside and passenger’s side separately.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver andpassenger. If the driver’s side of thevehicle is getting too much sun, thesystem will adjust to a lowertemperature.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on ifit was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windshield faster, youcan close the dashboard corner ventsby rotating the wheel below eachvent. This sends more warm air tothe windshield defroster vents. Oncethe windshield is clear, select freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.

1.

2.3.

On models with navigation system

Climate Control

To Cool or Heat Automatically

Using Automatic Climate Control

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

131

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：０６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３６　

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

The climate control system has atemperature sensor next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensor or spill any liquid on it.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO modeand starts to run at its lowest speed.Press the button to make thefan run faster.

Climate Control

Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off

Temperature Sensor

132

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０６／０８／１９　１８：０９：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３７　

Audio System

Features

133

Models without navigation system Models with navigation system

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３８　

Audio System (Models without Navigation System)

134

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

SEEK BUTTONS

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

０６／０８／１９　１１：２２：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１３９　

－

－

＋－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune ahigher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune a lower frequency.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

CONTINUED

TUNE

SEEK

SCANPlaying the AM/FM Radio Selecting a Station


Features

135

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４０　

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

1.

2.

3.

4.

178

To turn off auto select,

Preset AUTO SELECT


136

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：４０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４１　

－－

－

Bass, treble, balance, and fader areeach adjustable. In addition, you canadjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center and thesubwoofer speakers.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from the centerspeaker and the subwoofer speaker.

If you turn the TUNE/SOUND knoball the way to the left, you will see‘‘OFF’’ in the display, and the centerspeaker and/or subwoofer speakerwill be off.

Press the TUNE/SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the bass, treble,balance, fader, center and subwoofersetting.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Use the TREB/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjust the side-to-side strength,and FADE adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound Center/SubwooferTreble/Bass

Balance/Fader


Features

137

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：４７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４２　

－

－＊

＊

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

DolbyPL (Prologic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from the audio signalrecorded with two channel stereosources. Dolby prologic II can onlyactivate when using the CD (CD-DA,MP3/WMA), XM radio, and AUXaudio modes. When it activates,‘‘DPL II’’ is shown on the upperdisplay.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

89

SVC Audio System Lighting

Dolby PL (Prologic) IISpeed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


138

０６／０８／１８　２１：０６：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４３　

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska. XMSatellite Radio is also available onCanadian models.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.


Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

139

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

XM BUTTON DISP/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４４　

－

－

○ ○ －－＋

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’button. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In anymode, press either button to selectanother category.

Operating the XM Radio MODE

TUNE

CATEGORY ( or )


140

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４５　

－－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

The scan function givesyou sampling of all channels while inthe channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for 10 seconds, thenselects the next channel. When youhear a channel you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

PresetSCAN


Features

141

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


142

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：２２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４７　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


Features

143

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４８　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system and press the XMRADIO button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you shouldbe able to listen to XM radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


144

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１４９　

－

＋

CONTINUED


Operating the Disc Changer

Features

145

DISC SLOT

SEEK BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

EJECT BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

DISC/TAPE BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５０　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer that holds up tosix discs. You operate this discchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To operate the discchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CDCD-RDVD-ADTS

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rateand multi-session.Maximum layers (includingROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320kbps (MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers


146

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０６／０８／１８　２１：０７：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５１　

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

When the ‘‘DISC LOAD’’ appearsin the display, insert the next discinto the slot.

To load a single disc:Press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and thegreen load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

Select the disc changer by pressingthe DISC/TAPE button. The systemwill begin playing the last selecteddisc in the disc changer. You will seethe disc and track numbersdisplayed.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

To select a different disc when all sixpositions are loaded, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Loading Discs in the Changer Playing a Disc


Features

147

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５２　

＋－

－＋

－

＞

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

Use the SEEK or SEEK buttonwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the SEEK button, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA). Press and releasethe SEEK button to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

When loading a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SEEK


148

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：１０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５３　

－

－

－－

－

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeTo

select a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will see F-RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. To turn off folderrepeat, press the RPT button for 2seconds, or push it twice.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

When you pressthe RPT button three times, D-RPTappears in the display, and thesystem continuously replays thecurrent disc. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button or touch DISCRPT again.

This feature playsthe tracks within a disc (the fileswithin a folder in MP3 or WMAmode) in random order. To activaterandom play in CD-DA format, pressand release the RDM button. In MP3or WMA mode, press the RDMbutton to activate random play withina folder. You will see F-RDM in thedisplay. To return to normal play,press the RPT button for 2 seconds,or push it twice.

CONTINUED

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEATDISC REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc/folder)


Features

149

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５４　

－

－－In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button, or insert atape in the tape player. To return todisc mode, press the DISC/TAPEbutton.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press theSCAN button. In MP3 or WMAmode, press the SCAN button toselect SCAN. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press the SCAN button again toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the remainingfolders for 10 seconds each. Afterplaying the first file of the last folder,the system plays normally.

To turn folder scan off, press eitherSEEK button, select a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, or pressthe SCAN button.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order.To activate folder random, press theRDM button twice. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play files randomly.This continues until you deactivatefolder random by pressing the RDMbutton again, or by selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE knob.

To Stop Playing a Disc

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOM


150

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５５　

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button. When that disc beginsplaying, press the eject button.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another disc within 10seconds, the system selects theprevious mode (AM, FM1, FM2,tape, or XM Radio).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system reloads it after10 seconds and puts the changer inpause mode. To begin playing thedisc, press the DISC/TAPE button.

Removing Discs from theChanger


Features

151

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５６　

▲

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Make sure the open side ofthe tape is facing right, then insertthe tape most of the way into the slot.The system will pull the tape in therest of the way and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator in thedisplay comes on to show you whichside of the tape is playing. Theindicates the side you insertedupward is now playing. If you want toplay the other side, press the PLAY/PROG (preset 2) button. When theplayer reaches the end of the tape, itwill automatically reverse directionand play the other side.


Playing a Tape

152

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

REWIND BUTTON DOLBY BUTTON

PLAY/PROGRAM BUTTON

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTON

０６／０８／１９　１１：２２：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５７　

＊

＊

－

－－

＋

－

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing the

(preset 4) button. Dolbyremains off until you press thebutton again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton. If you want to turn the playeroff, press the power/volume knob orturn off the ignition. The tape willremain in the drive. When you turnthe system back on, the tape willbegin playing where it left off.

To rewind the tape,push the (preset 1) button. Youwill see REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the

(preset 3) button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the , ,or PLAY/PROG button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Press the SEEK buttonto find the beginning of the currentsong or passage. Press the SEEKbutton to find the beginning of thenext song or passage. When thesystem reaches the beginning of asong or passage, it begins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

To switch to the AM/FM radio, XMRadio, or disc changer while a tape isplaying, press the AM/FM button,XM button, or DISC/TAPE button.To change back to the tape player,press the DISC/TAPE button.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

CONTINUED

To Stop Playing a Tape Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP

REPEAT


Features

153

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５８　

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Caring for the Player and Tapes


154

NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１５９　

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with Navigation System)

Features

155

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

XM RADIOBUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０８：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６０　

－

－

＋－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune ahigher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune a lower frequency.

You can also operate the audiosystem using the control icons on theaudio screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, STEREOwill be displayed on the audio screenif the station is broadcasting instereo. Stereo reproduction in AM isnot available.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

TUNE

SEEK

SCANPlaying the AM/FM Radio Selecting a Station


156

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：０６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６１　

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

1.

2.

3.

4.

178

To turn off auto select,

Preset AUTO SELECT


Features

157

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６２　

－－＋

－

－

－

－＋

－

－＊

＊

Bass, treble, left/right balance, andfront/rear fader are each adjustable.In addition, you can adjust thestrength of the sound coming fromthe center and the subwooferspeakers.

To adjust them, enter the sound gridby touching the SOUND icon on thedisplay or pressing the TUNE/SOUND knob.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or icon on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar, or tune the TUNE/SOUNDknob.

Adjusts the side-to-sidestrength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.To adjust the front/rear fader, touchthe FR or RR icon.

To adjust thestrength of the sound coming fromthe center or subwoofer speaker,touch the or icon on each sideof the center or subwooferadjustment bar.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from the audio signalrecorded with two channel stereosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlyactivate when using the CD (CD-DA,MP3/WMA), XM radio, and AUXaudio modes. When it activates,‘‘DPL2’’ is shown on the upperdisplay. To turn this feature on or off,touch the On or Off icon.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance

Fader

Center/Subwoofer

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II


158

０６／０８／１９　１１：２３：３８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６３　

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska. XMSatellite Radio is also available onCanadian models.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.


Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

159

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

MODE ICON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN ICON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

XM RADIOBUTTON

DIS/MODEBUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：３０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６４　

－

－

○ ○ －－＋

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’button. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch between thechannel mode and the categorymode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the modechanges, or touch the MODE iconon the audio display.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In anymode, press either button to selectanother category.

Operating the XM Radio MODE

TUNE

CATEGORY ( or )


160

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６５　

－－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons. Each buttonstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

To store a channel:

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton (icon) to tune to it.

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay. The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for 10seconds. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button or touch theicon again.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

PresetSCAN


Features

161

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：４５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


162

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６７　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

CONTINUED


Features

163

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

０６／０８／１８　２１：０９：５６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６８　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you shouldbe able to listen to XM radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system and press the XMRADIO button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.


www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


164

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１６９　

＋

－

CONTINUED


Operating the Disc Changer

Features

165

DISC SLOT

SEEK BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

DISC/TAPE BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

EJECT BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７０　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer that holds up tosix discs. You operate this discchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To operate the discchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

CDCD-RDVD-ADTS

The disc changer can play these discformats:

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rateand multi-session.Maximum layers (includingROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320kbps (MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers


166

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：２１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７１　

－

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

When the ‘‘DISC LOAD’’ appearsin the display, insert the next discinto the slot.

To load a single disc:Press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and thegreen load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

Select the disc changer by pressingthe DISC/TAPE button. The systemwill begin playing the last selecteddisc in the disc changer. You will seethe disc and track numbersdisplayed.

To select a different disc when all sixpositions are loaded, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons. You can also select a disc bytouching the appropriate disc icon (1

6).

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

4.

Loading Discs in the Changer Playing a Disc


Features

167

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７２　

＋－

－＋

－

＞

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

Use the SEEK or SEEK buttonwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the SEEK button, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA). Press and releasethe SEEK button to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SEEK


168

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７３　

－

－

－－

－

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeTo

select a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button ortouch the REPEAT icon on the audioscreen. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press and hold the RPTbutton for 2 seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will see F-RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. To turn off folderrepeat, press the RPT button for 2seconds, or push it twice.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

When you pressthe RPT button three times, D-RPTappears in the display, and thesystem continuously replays thecurrent disc. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button or touch DISCRPT again.

This feature playsthe tracks within a disc (the fileswithin a folder in MP3 or WMAmode) in random order. To activaterandom play in CD-DA format, pressand release the RDM button. In MP3or WMA mode, press the RDMbutton to activate random play withina folder. You will see F-RDM in thedisplay. To return to normal play,press the RPT button for 2 seconds,or push it twice.

CONTINUED

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEATDISC REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc/folder)


Features

169

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：４８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７４　

－－－

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeThe scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press theSCAN button or touch the SCANicon on the audio screen. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly to select SCAN. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press the SCANbutton or touch the SCAN icon againto get out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the remainingfolders for 10 seconds each. Afterplaying the first file of the last folder,the system plays normally.

To turn folder scan off, press eitherSEEK button, select a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, or pressthe SCAN button.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order.To activate folder random, press theRDM button twice. You will see F-RDM in the display. The system willthen select and play files randomly.This continues until you deactivatefolder random by pressing the RDMbutton again, or by selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE knob.

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOM


170

０６／０８／１８　２１：１０：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７５　

▲ ▼

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side ofthe display. To go back to theprevious display, touch the Returnicon on the display.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button, or insert atape in the tape player. To return todisc mode, press the DISC/TAPEbutton.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Touch the TRACK LISTicon. The track list menu appears onthe audio display.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

Using a Track List To Stop Playing a Disc


Features

171

FOLDER ICON TRACK FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７６　

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another disc within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode (AM, FM1, FM2,tape, or XM Radio).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put thedisc changer in pause mode. Tobegin playing the disc, press the discbutton.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or touching theappropriate disc icon on the audiodisplay. When that disc beginsplaying, press the eject button.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

Removing Discs from theChanger


172

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７７　

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Make sure the open side ofthe tape is facing right, then insertthe tape most of the way into the slot.The system will pull the tape in therest of the way and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator in thedisplay comes on to show you whichside of the tape is playing. The

indicates the side you insertedupward is now playing. If you want toplay the other side, press the PLAY/PROG (preset 2) button or touch the

or icon. When the playerreaches the end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

CONTINUED


Playing a Tape

Features

173

REWIND BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

REPEATBUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

PLAY/PROGRAMBUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

０６／０８／１９　１１：２３：４５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７８　

＊

－

－－

＋

＊

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton. If you want to turn the playeroff, press the power/volume knob orturn off the ignition. The tape willremain in the drive. When you turnthe system back on, the tape willbegin playing where it left off.

To rewind the tape,push the (preset 1) button ortouch the REW on the audio screen.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the

(preset 3) button or touch theFF icon. You will see FF displayed.Press the , , or PLAY/PROG button or touch the REW, FF,

or icon to take the systemout of rewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The ‘‘NR’’indicator will come on in the display.If the tape was not recorded in Dolby,turn it off by pressing the

(preset 4) button or touch theNR icon. Dolby remains off until youpress the button again.

Press the SEEK buttonto find the beginning of the currentsong or passage. Press the SEEKbutton to find the beginning of thenext song or passage. When thesystem reaches the beginning of asong or passage, it begins to play it.

To switch to the AM/FM radio, XMRadio, or disc changer while a tape isplaying, press the AM/FM button,XM button, or DISC/TAPE button.To change back to the tape player,press the DISC/TAPE button.

To Stop Playing a Tape Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP


174

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１７９　

－The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Press the RPT buttonor touch the REPEAT icon on theaudio display to continuously play asong or passage. You will see RPTdisplayed. The track will repeat untilyou press the button or touch theicon again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Caring for the Player and TapesREPEAT


Features

175

NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８０　

Message Cause SolutionThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

FOCUS error.

No CD in the changer.

Mechanical error.

High temperature.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Insert a disc or discs.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be remove, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Changer Error Messages

176

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８１　

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality discs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the disc changer.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

Features

177

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：４９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８２　

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Your vehicle’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicle’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

178

０６／０８／１８　２１：１１：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８３　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

179

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：０３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８４　

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket in the console compartment.The system will accept auxiliaryinput from standard audioaccessories using a 1/8 inch stereominiplug.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

Auxiliary Input Jack

180

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８５　

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Radio (U.S. models), a disc (if adisc is loaded), or a tape (if a tape isloaded).

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

Features

181

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８６　

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom your dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If the code card is lost, your dealercan access your code with yourradio’s serial number. To access theserial number, turn the radio on. Itmust display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the

radio off. Push the preset 1, preset 6,and power buttons at the same time,then quickly release. The serialnumber will appear.

Radio Theft Protection

182

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：２１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８７　

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk is opened with the trunkrelease button on the driver’s door,the trunk release handle behind thetrunk pass-through cover, or theemergency trunk opener.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the hoodwithout using the key or the remotetransmitter will cause the system toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ) to see if thedoors and trunk are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the hood.

68

Security System

Features

183

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８８　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

184

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１８９　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle speeds up about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.Push on the accelerator pedal.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control on, you canstill use the accelerator pedal tospeed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

185

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９０　

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem remembers the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson, and the vehicle accelerates to thesame cruising speed as before.

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

186

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０６／０８／１８　２１：１２：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９１　

－

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do nothave the safety feature that causes

the motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote transmitterfor the device (garage door,automatic gate, security system, etc.)has a fresh battery.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 10 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1 in the chart on the next page.

Before you begin

CONTINUED

General Information


Training HomeLink

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Features

187

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９２　


188

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：１２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９３　

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.





Features

189

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９４　

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy safe,hands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable in English on U.S. models,and in both English and French onCanadian models. To change thelanguage, see page .

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

( In Canada, visit) or by calling the

Hands Free Link customer supportat

Your vehicle’s HFL system has thecellular phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourcellular phonebook to the HFL.Using the navigation system, you canmake a call directly and store adesired number in the HFL from thelist shown on the navigation display.For more information on how toimport the phonebook or to make acall, see page .

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFL directly fromyour cellular phone using the receivecontact function in the HFL.

200

214

193

193

handsfreelink.com.www.acura.ca.

(888) 528-7876.

On vehicles with navigation system

On all models

Phonebook

Voice Control

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

HandsFreeLink

190

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９５　

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the HomeLink buttons. Onmodels with navigation system, themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

Microphone HFL Buttons

Audio System

HandsFreeLink

Features

191

HFL TALKBUTTON

HFL BACKBUTTON

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９６　

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL onthe multi-information display, youwill see this information on thescreen:

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

:


HandsFreeLink

192

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９７　

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

All phones may not operateidentically, and some may causeinconsistent operation of the HFL.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press andrelease the Talk button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

For better voice recognition,lowering the fan speed may benecessary.

Adjust the air flow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

After pressing the Talk button,wait for the beep, then give a voicecommand.

CONTINUED

How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control

HandsFreeLink

Features

193

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９８　

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the TALKbutton, wait for the beep, and say,‘‘Hands free link help.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

HandsFreeLink

194

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１３：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０１９９　

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likethe notification to be a ring tone ora prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ afterthe beep, the HFL returns to itsmain menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will resultin no ring tone or prompt playbackduring an incoming call. The audiosystem will still mute, and amessage will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Aring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘Anincoming call prompt will be used.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFL response continues ‘‘Asecurity option is available to lockthe HFL. Each time the vehicle isturned on, a passcode would berequired to use this system. Wouldyou like this security option turnedon?’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can setyour passcode. Refer to the settingprocedure on the next page.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System

HandsFreeLink

Features

195

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２００　

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Follow the system setupprocedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thefour-digit number you would liketo set as your passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security is on.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. The system setupis complete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘Security will notbe used. The system setup iscomplete.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for yourpasscode each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position and you press the Talkbutton. You will only be asked forthe passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, itsresponse is ‘‘The system is locked.What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If thepasscode is not correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.Please try again.’’ Go back to thestep 2.

If you forget your passcode and youcannot activate the HFL, consultyour dealer to cancel the passcode.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

To set your passcode, do this:

To enter your passcode, do this;

Setting Your Passcode

HandsFreeLink

196

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０１　

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

call theHandsFreeLink customer supportat (888) 528-7876, or call yourphone retailer.

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

handsfreelink.com,

CONTINUED

Pairing Your Phone

NOTE:

HandsFreeLink

Features

197

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：２９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０２　

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Once the pairing process iscompleted, AcuraLink may display aconnection confirmation screen. Thisscreen is used to create a dataconnection between your cell phoneand the AcuraLink system. You canchoose to set up the data connectionnow, or do it later. If you want to do

it now, exit the HFL menu bypressing the HFL Back button oneor more times.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

1.

2.

3.

4.6.

1.

2.

3.

7.

8.

To rename a paired phone, do this:

To delete a paired phone, do this:

HandsFreeLink

198

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：３９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０３　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When all

phones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

1.

2.

1.

4.

5.

1.

2.

To list all paired phones, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Features

199

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：４７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０４　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on thenavigation display.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

For more information on how tomake a call, see page .

2.

4.

1.

3.

205

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

On vehicles with navigationsystem

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink

200

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１４：５５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０５　

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

1.

1.2.

3.

4.

2.

CONTINUED

Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

HandsFreeLink

Features

201

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０６　

To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from the HFL to thephone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from your phone tothe HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

2.

1.

3.

3.

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

HandsFreeLink

202

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：１４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０７　

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

1.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

2.

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

CONTINUED

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook

HandsFreeLink

Features

203

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０８　

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

2.

1.

3.

3.2.

1.

4.

5. 4.

1.

2.

HandsFreeLink

204

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２０９　

？

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

To store a phone number from yourphone:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘The receive process requiresoperation of your Bluetooth device.For safety, only perform thisfunction while the vehicle isstopped. HFL is now waiting toreceive contact from a Bluetoothdevice.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number To discardthis, say ‘Discard.’ ’’


You can store the desired number tothe HFL phonebook directly fromyour cellular phone. Not all phoneshave this capability. For moreinformation, visit

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, receive contact andlist.’’

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone

HandsFreeLink

Features

205

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：４７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１０　

, or call 888-528-7876.

？

？

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Neil at work will bestored. Is this correct ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neilat work has been stored. If morethan one number was received forthe contact entry, the HFL asksfor the name of the next number.If only one number is received, orall numbers have been stored, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likeHFL to receive another contact?’’

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘HFL is now waitingto receive a contact from aBluetooth device.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Susan at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susanat work has been stored. Wouldyou like HFL to receive anothercontact?’’

If you do not want to continue tostore any other numbers, pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘No.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number To discardthis, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

HandsFreeLink

206

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１５：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１１　


www.acura.com/handsfreelink

To use the cellular phonebook withthe HFL, say or select ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ from the Informationscreen. The navigation display willchange as shown above.

PIN Number. This option allows youto add, change, or remove a PINnumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to store thephonebook of your cellular phone inthe HFL. When you link your phoneto the HFL and select this option, thesystem will start importing andloading the phonebook.

If any phonebook is not stored andyour phone is not linked to the HFL,Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in theHandsFreeLink phonebook fromyour cellular phonebook. With theHFL, you can then automatically dialany name or number in thephonebook. Not all phones have thiscapability. For more information,visit , orcall 800-528-7876.

CONTINUED

Cellular Phonebook Options

HandsFreeLink

Features

207

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１２　

Search Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to search thephone numbers stored in the HFL.When you enter a keyword for aperson’s name, such as the firstname or last name, the system willfind the number you want and letyou make calls.

Delete Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to delete the storedphonebook from the HFL. When youlink your phone to the HFL andselect this option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from the HFL(see page ).

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

For information on linking to theHFL, see page .

You can import the phonebook ofyour cellular phone into the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL, andselect ‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.When the message ‘‘The import wassuccessful.’’ is displayed, push in onthe joystick to select ‘‘OK.’’

211

197

To import the cellular phonebook

HandsFreeLink

NOTE:

208

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１３　

To search the imported phonebook Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords.

Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Enter the PIN number. You cannotaccess a PIN protected phonebook ifyou do not use the correct PINnumber.

Enter the keyword for a person’sname, such as the first name or lastname, using the joystick. If thesystem does not find an exact match,say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

209

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１４　

－Select the number (1 6) of thedesired person from the list.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the right side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson. If a name has more thanthree category icons, ‘‘ ’’ isdisplayed.

The following category icons willappear:

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in the HFL.

Say or select ‘‘STORE INHandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.

· · ·

To store an imported phonebooknumber

HandsFreeLink

210

Work

Home

Preference

Mobile

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

TM

０６／０８／１９　１１：２３：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１５　

To delete the imported phonebook

You can delete the storedphonebook from the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL andselect ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

After you enter the correct PINnumber, or if the phonebook youselect is not PIN protected, thefollowing screen appears.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message‘‘The imported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

211

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：３９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１６　

To add, change, or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

To add a PIN number

You can add, change or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select the phonebook you wish toadd the PIN number to. Thephonebook you select cannotalready have a PIN icon. Thedisplay will change as shownabove.

Enter the 4-digit PIN number. Youwill be asked to re-enter the PIN toverify.

1. 2.

HandsFreeLink

212

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１７　

To change a PIN number

Select the phonebook you wish tochange the PIN number for. Thedisplay will change as shownabove.

Enter your current PIN number. Enter your new 4-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

1. 2. 3.

HandsFreeLink

Features

213

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１６：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１８　

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,all names in the HFL phonebook,and all imported phonebooks.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Vous avezselectionne Francais. Les nomsenregistres en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrancais. Voulez-vous continuer?You have selected French. Nametags that were stored while inEnglish mode will not beaccessible in French mode. Wouldyou like to continue? ’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.To clear the system, do this:

Canadian models onlyTo change from English to French, dothis:

Clearing the System Changing Language

HandsFreeLink

214

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：０２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２１９　

＜＞

＜＞

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui or Yes,’’ Ifthere are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Venillezattendre que le systeme change delangue. Please wait while thelanguage is changed.’’ ‘‘La languea ete changee. Retour au menuprincipal.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Francais?’’

3. 4.

1.

To change from French to English, dothis:

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

215

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２０　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like to continue?Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Lesnoms enregistres en modeFrancais ne seront pas accessibleen mode Anglais. Voulez-vouscontnuez?’’

2.

＜＞

＜＞

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes or Oui.’’ Ifthere are no paired phoneswithout English name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Please waitwhile the language is changed.Venillez attendre que le systemechange de langue.’’ ‘‘The languagehas been changed. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

You cannot use the HFL while usingAcuraLink.

3. 4.

HandsFreeLink

HFL Limitation

216

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２１　

AcuraLink enhances your ownershipexperience by providing a directcommunication link between yourvehicle and the Acura Server.Working through the XM radiosatellite, AcuraLink works inconjunction with the navigationsystem, HandsFreeLink (HFL), andaudio system in your vehicle. Itdisplays and receives several kindsof messages, including:

Operating tips and information onyour vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safetyinformation.

Maintenance information to keepyour vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provideinformation about any problemswith your vehicle.

The touch panel controls most of theAcuraLink functions.


AcuraLink

Features

217

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２２　

If you have new messages, anenvelope icon appears in the topright corner of the navigation screen.

To open a message:

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. Theinformation screen will be shown.

Press the INFO button, then selectNew Message from the navigationsystem map menu.

A list of all messages will be shown.New Messages will be at the top.Select the message you want to readby touching it on the screen.

Reading Messages

AcuraLink

218

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２３　

Unread messages have a closedenvelope icon next to them. The icondisappears when it has already beenread.

Only diagnostic infomessages overlay the navigationscreen while driving. They indicate ifyour vehicle has a problem that mayneed immediate attention (see page

).

After purchasing your vehicle,messages may not appearimmediately.Your dealer has to register thevehicle identification before you canreceive messages. This can takeseveral days to process.

When you open a message, you canread a summary of it, and thenchoose one of several options. If anoption is not available for a message,that button will not be highlighted.

Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select amessage category by touching it onthe screen. You will see the abovedisplay. Select the message you wantto read by touching it on the screen.

224

CONTINUED

AcuraLink

Message Options

Features

219

NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２４　

－

－

－

－

－

－Select this button todelete the current message.

Select this button to hear avoice read the entire message. Thisgives you more information than thescreen can display at one time. Whenyou select the Voice button, itchanges to a Stop Reading button.Select the button again to stop thevoice.

Select this button to call aphone number embedded in themessage. When you select , theHandsFreeLink (HFL) dials thenumber for you.

To set your AcuraLink preferences(the types of messages you want toreceive, if any), visit the Owner Linkwebsite at www.owners.acura.com,and choose what you would like toreceive. If you do not have internetaccess, call Acura Client Services at(800) 382-2238; they can set yourmessage preferences for you.

Select this button to find the nearestAcura dealer using the navigationsystem.

Selectthis button to call the Acura dealeryou purchased your vehicle from.AcuraLink also directs you to thisdealer so you can schedule amaintenance appointment or receiveinformation about a message. If yourassigned servicing dealer changes,AcuraLink will reset to call thatdealer.

To make a call, your Bluetoothcompatible phone must be paired tothe vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,powered on, and located within thevehicle (see page ).

Select thisbutton to get more information aboutthe current diagnostic message. Touse this option, your phone must bepaired with the HFL. In addition, thepaired phone must have a compatibledata service and be set up with theAcuraLink system to make a dataconnection. Access thehandsfreelink.com website to findout which data services are currentlycompatible with AcuraLink.

197

Delete

Voice

Call

CallMessage Preferences

Find Nearest Acura Dealer

Call Your Acura Dealer

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink

220

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２５　

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messagescommand does not apply toDiagnostic Info and Recall messages.They can only be deleted by yourdealer.

Press the SETUP button to viewthe setup screen.

Select MORE by touching it on thepanel.

Scroll to the AcuraLink/Messagesbutton, and select it by touching iton the panel.

Scroll to the Delete Messagesoption, and select it by touching iton the panel.

Scroll to the category with themessages you want to delete, andselect the category by touching iton the panel.

Scroll to Delete, and select it bytouching on the panel.

Select the message you want todelete.

Select the message category thatcontains the message you want todelete.

Scroll to the Messages option,then select it by touching on thepanel.

Press the INFO button to bring upthe Information screen.

To delete a single message:

Diagnostic info and recall/campaign messages can only bedeleted by your dealer.

AcuraLink

Deleting Messages

Features

221

NOTE:NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：１７：５３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２６　

There are six message categories inAcuraLink: Quick Tips, FeatureGuides, Maintenance Minders,Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,and Dealer Appointment Reminders.The system can store up to 256messages.

Message categories can be added,revised, or deleted throughbroadcast messages from Acura.

During the first 90 days ofownership, one of up to 32 differentmessages appears each day. Thesemessages help you to use andunderstand the features of yourvehicle.

These messages, based on updatedvehicle information and commentsfrom other TL owners, supplementyour Owner’s Manual and QuickStart Guide. They provide you withrelevant information for a safe andenjoyable ownership experience. Foradditional information, call AcuraClient Services directly through theHFL.

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

AcuraLink

222

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２７　

If your vehicle is affected by a recallor other important safetyinformation, a letter will be mailed toyou about the issue and how to fix it.If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,you will also receive a remindermessage through AcuraLink. Youcan then use the message options tocall your dealer for an appointmentor to find the nearest dealer.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

These messages provide detailedinformation about the serviceneeded for your vehicle. When amaintenance message appears onthe multi-information display, a list ofneeded maintenance items isprovided through in an AcuraLinkmessage. These messages tell youthe exact maintenance needed,helping you to avoid unnecessarymaintenance costs.

Recall/CampaignsMaintenance Minder

AcuraLink

Features

223

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２８　

Depending on the severity of theproblem, the message will let youknow if you should see your dealerimmediately or if you can wait until alater date.

When an instrument panel indicatorcomes on or a message is displayedon the multi-information display(MID), AcuraLink can provideinformation about the cause of theindicator or message and therecommended action to address it.This helps you handle the problemas it occurs, preventing or limitingcostly repairs.

When an instrument panel indicatorcomes on or a message is displayedon the MID, AcuraLink immediatelynotifies you with the message, ‘‘Anindicator is on. AcuraLink can helpyou decide what to do.’’ If you do notwant the information right away,select the Check Later option. If youwant the information now, select theCheck Now option. (If the navigationscreen is not active, you must selectOK from the navigation disclaimerscreen before you can check the

information.)

For more information on theinstrument panel indicators, see page

.

The AcuraLink system cannotdetermine some mechanicalproblems (such as squeaks orrattles) that are not triggered by thediagnostic indicator monitors.

57

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink

224

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：１３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２２９　

When you make an appointmentthrough the Owner Link OnlineScheduling Service, you can bereminded about that appointmentthrough AcuraLink in advance. Ifyou need to reschedule, you can callyour dealer directly with the HFL.

The timing of your reminder isbased on your reminder preferenceestablished on Owner Link.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

When viewing a diagnostic infomessage through the INFO menu,you can use the Diagnostic Infobutton to connect to the Acuraserver and retrieve the latestinformation regarding the problem.

NOTE: There may not be anyadditional information, depending onthe time elapsed since the previoustime you retrieved the informationfrom the Acura server.

Dealer Appointment Reminder

AcuraLink

Features

225

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３０　

－

－

－

Select ON if you want to be notifiedof new messages (envelope iconappears on the navigation screen).Select OFF if you do not want to benotified of new messages (envelopeicon does not appear on the screen).Messages can still be accessed usingthe INFO menu. If you would like tostop receiving messages, visit theOwnerLink website at www.owners.acura.com to change your messagingpreferences.

Select ON to havethe system automatically read eachmessage to you. Select OFF tomanually select the Voice buttonwhen you want a message read toyou.

To access the following functions,press the SETUP button, touch theMORE button, then selectAcuraLink/Messages by touchingon the screen.

Select thisbutton to delete all stored messageswithin a category, except fordiagnostic info and recall campaignmessages. These messages can onlybe deleted by a certified technicianafter the recall is done or theproblem is corrected, or through abroadcast message from Acura.

New Message Notification

Auto Reading

AcuraLink/Messages Screen

Delete Messages

AcuraLink

226

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３１　

－

－

Selectthis button to begin the processrequired to connect to Acura. This isused to access the most recentdiagnostic information when aproblem occurs.

The default setting is prompt. Whena diagnostic info message appears,and you select the Check Nowbutton, the system will prompt youbefore connecting to the Acuraserver. If you do not wish to connectat that time, select No at the prompt,and you will see the informationfrom the onboard database. The‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove theprompt when you select the CheckNow button and will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server. Thissetting only applies when you have aBluetooth enabled phone that ispaired with the HFL and you havecompleted the Phone-DataConnection setup.

For the Phone DataConnection button to be active, youneed a Bluetooth compatible andenabled cell phone paired to theHandsFreeLink (HFL). To completethe date connection setup, the pairedphone must have a compatible dataservice.To find more information onBluetooth compatible and enabledcell phones, visit handsfreelink.com. orcall the Hands Free Link customer

support at (888) 528-7876.Phone-Data Connection

Connect to the Acura Server

AcuraLink

Features

227

NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３２　

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Press and hold the andbuttons simultaneously until

the temperature display changes(about 5 seconds).

Verify the zone for your area onthe map on page .

Press the button to cycle thecount down, or the button tocycle the count up. Once thecorrect zone is displayed, continueto step 4.

Press the OFF button to save thezone selection.

To exit the zone setting mode,either press the button and

button simultaneously forabout 5 seconds, or press anyclimate control button on eitherside of the display other than the

or button.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

230

On models without navigation systemCompass Operation

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

228

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：４５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３３　

－－

－－

－－

If you see ‘‘ ’’ in the compassdisplay, the compass is self-calibrating. The compass may needto be manually calibrated afterexposure to a strong magnetic field.If the compass seems to becontinuously showing the wrongdirection and is not self-calibrating,do the following.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

Press and hold the andbuttons simultaneously until

the temperature display changes(about 5 seconds).

Verify that the zone setting iscorrect by finding your area on themap on page .

Press the button to cycle thecount down, or the button tocount up. Once the correct zone isdisplayed, continue to step 4.

Press the OFF button to save thezone selection.

Press the OFF button again tobegin calibrating the compass.The heading should now show‘‘ ’’.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

When the display goes from‘‘ ’’ to an actual heading, theunit is calibrated and the displayreturns to normal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

230

CONTINUED

Compass

Compass Calibration

Features

229

NOTE:

０６／０８／１８　２１：１８：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３４　

Compass

230

Zone Map

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３５　

On vehicles with navigation system Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Rearview Camera and Monitor

Features

231

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３６　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 234.................Fuel Recommendation . 234

.........Service Station Procedures . 235....................................Refueling . 235

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 237

...................................Oil Check . 238.............Engine Coolant Check . 239

...............................Fuel Economy . 239...Accessories and Modifications . 240

.............................Carrying Cargo . 243

Before Driving

Before

Driving

233

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３８　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until themulti-information display indicatesit is needed.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. If thisoctane grade is unavailable, regularunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane of 87 or higher may be usedtemporarily. The use of regularunleaded gasoline can cause metallicknocking noises in the engine andwill result in decreased engineperformance. The long-term use ofregular-grade gasoline can lead toengine damage.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead to

engine damage.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

Type S

All models except Type S

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

234

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２３９　

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the knob on the cap in thenotch on the fuel fill door.

If your notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station, or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

1.

2.

3.

4.On TL with manual transmission

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Before

Driving

235

Pull

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４０　

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days ofnormal driving once you tighten or

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapor from goinginto the atmosphere. Try filling atanother pump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display, and themalfunction indicator lamp mayalso come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

5.

6.

68

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off Tighten Fuel Cap Message

Service Station Procedure

236

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４１　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille to locate the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporativeemissions system, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on. Ifthe fuel fill cap was not alreadytightened, turn the engine off, andcheck or retighten the fuel fill capuntil it clicks at least once. TheMIL should go off after severaldays of normal driving once thecap is tightened or replaced. If theMIL does not go off, have yourvehicle inspected by a dealer. Formore information, see page .

1.

2. 3.

325

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Hood


Before

Driving

237

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４２　

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.Make sure the hood is securelylatched.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

1.

2.

3.

283

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil


238

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

０６／０８／１８　２１：１９：５３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４３　

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages given by the multi-information display. See

on page.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

277

286

277

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Engine Coolant Check

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

239

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：０３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４４　

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

327Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

240

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：１２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４５　

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Non-Acura wheels, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and may not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

241

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：１９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４６　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsConsole compartmentTrunkRoof-rack (if installed)

In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

242

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

GLOVE BOXSEAT-BACK POCKETTRUNK

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４７　

－ ×

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit:The maximum load for your vehicle

is 850 lbs/385 kg (U.S.), 870 lbs/395kg (Canada). This figure includesthe total weight of all occupants,cargo, and accessories.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs/385 kg (U.S.), 870 lbs/395 kg(Canada)’’ on your vehicle’splacard. [The placard is on thedriver’s doorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in the vehicle.[Five is seating capacity of yourvehicle.]

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs/385 kg (U.S.), 870 lbs/395kg (Canada).

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the amount equals

850 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in step 4.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessoriescargo must not exceed the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) or thegross axle weight rating (GAWR).Both are on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

1.

5.

3.

2.

4.

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

243

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０６／０８／２８　１６：３７：５６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４８　

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons. There is also aside net that can be used on eitherside of the trunk.When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the pocket in the sparetire tool case.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

52

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Cargo NetsCarrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo

244

CARGO NET

TRUNK HOOK BUTTONS

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２４９　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and the automatictransmission. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA) systemand the tire pressure monitoringsystem.

........................Preparing to Drive . 246.......................Starting the Engine . 247

...................Manual Transmission . 250..............Automatic Transmission . 253

...........................................Parking . 260.............................Braking System . 261

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 262Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 264Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 266...........................Towing a Trailer . 270

Driving

Driving

245

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：４８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５０　

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , and

).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.103

107

91

14

57 6568

Preparing to Drive

246

０６／０８／１８　２１：２０：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５１　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

94

Starting the Engine (Models with Manual Transmission)

Driving

247

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５２　

Your vehicle’s starting system has anauto control mode. When you turnthe ignition switch to the START(III) position, this feature keeps theengine’s starter motor running untilthe engine starts. Follow theseinstructions to start the engine:

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, thenrelease the ignition switch. You donot need to hold the ignitionswitch in the START (III) positionto start the engine. Depending onthe outside temperature, thestarter motor runs for about 6 to 9seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch inthe START (III) position for morethan 7 seconds, the starter motor,depending on the outsidetemperature, runs for about 10 to25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

94

Starting the Engine (Models with Automatic Transmission)

248

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：１４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５３　

If there is a problem with thestarting system, you will see a‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay when the ignition switch isturned to the ON (II) position. Youwill also see this message when theauto control mode of the startingsystem has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignitionswitch has to be held in the START(III) position manually until theengine starts. The ignition switchcan be held in that position up to 15seconds.

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startingsystem, have your vehicle inspectedby a dealer.

Check Starting System Message

Starting the Engine (Models with Automatic Transmission)

Driving

249

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：２１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５４　

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromfifth to reverse instead of sixth (seepage ). When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

251

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; theengine speed limiter will not work in thissituation).

Manual Transmission

250

Note:

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５５　

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)36 mph (58 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)44 mph (71 km/h)

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

The manual transmission has anelectric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from fifth toreverse instead of sixth while thevehicle is moving.

CONTINUED

Engine Speed LimiterRecommended Shift Points Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

Driving

251

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５６　

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual Transmission

252

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：４０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５７　

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in. The illuminated numberunder the tachometer shows you thegear you have selected in theSequential SportShift mode.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates a

possible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

253

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：４８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５８　

－

－

－－

－

－

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically adjusts to keepthe engine at the best speed for thedriving conditions.For faster acceleration when in D,you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two or three gears, depending onyour speed.

Press the brakepedal to shift from Park to reverse.To shift from neutral to reverse,come to a complete stop and thenshift.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toreverse from neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10km/h).

If you cannot shift to reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,and then shift to reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’s

battery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to

on page ).

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromneutral to another gear.This position mechani-

cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .258

258To shift from:

P to R

R to NN to DD to LL to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

Drive (D)

Reverse (R)

Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release


254

０６／０８／１８　２１：２１：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２５９　

－

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,you can select the SequentialSportShift mode to shift gears muchlike a manual transmission, butwithout a clutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.

When you move theshift lever to this position, thetransmission shifts to the lowestgear that can be selected withoutexceeding the engine redline. Atnormal speeds, it selects third gear.As the vehicle slows, it selectssecond gear at about 56 mph(90 km/h), and first gear at about 29mph (47 km/h). Accelerating in firstgear, the transmission upshifts tosecond gear at about 37 mph(59 km/h). You must move the shiftlever to D for the transmission toupshift to third gear. On Type-S, atclosed throttle, it selects second gearat about 61 mph (98 km/h), and firstgear at about 37 mph (59 km/h).

CONTINUED

Sequential SportShift ModeLow (L)


Driving

255

SELECTED GEAR

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６０　

＋－

＋－

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

In Sequential SportShift mode, youcan also shift up or down by usingthe (right side) or (left side)paddle shifters on each side of thesteering wheel.

Each time you press the right side( ), the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Press the left side ( )to downshift. The number of thegear selected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will start infirst gear. You have to manuallyupshift between first and fifth gears.Make sure you upshift before theengine speed reaches thetachometer’s red zone.The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

On Type S only


256

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：１０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６１　

→

→

→

→→

→

→

→

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 9 mph (15 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

Speed range

under 18 mph(29 km/h)


Speed range



Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 9 mph(14 km/h)

over 18 mph(29 km/h)

over 37 mph(60 km/h)

Driving uphill

Driving on level roads and downhill

CONTINUED


Driving

257

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：２０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６２　

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range





To release the reverse lockout, makesure the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY(I) position.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Set the parking brake.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the reverselockout.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

When you are in SequentialSportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range





1.2.

Type S only

Shift Lock Release

Engine Speed Limiter

Starting in Second Gear


258

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：３０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６３　

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot. Press the brakepedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.

To release the reverse lockout,move the shift lever from neutralto reverse, then to Park.

3.

6.

5.

4.


Driving

259

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOTCOVER

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６４　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Parking Tips

Parking

260

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６５　

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalapplies the brakes slightly. Thisbuilds up heat, and reduces brakeeffectiveness and brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels, but the brake pedalmay not feel normal (see page

for more information).

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time and brakingeffectiveness could be reduced. It isnormal for the brakes to occasionallysqueal or squeak when you applythem.

326

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving

261

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：５３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６６　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .326

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

262

０６／０８／１８　２１：２２：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６７　

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

326

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

263

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：０６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６８　

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

On manual transmission models, ifthe VSA system is off and youaccelerate from a stop, the vehiclemay pull, and it may take extra effortto return the steering wheel tocenter.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

61

VSA System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

264

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２６９　

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

306

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

265

VSA OFF SWITCH

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：２６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７０　

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losingpressure on the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressureindicator and message on the multi-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

After inflating the tire(s) to theproper pressure, the low tirepressure indicator will remain onuntil the vehicle is driven at a speedmore than 25 mph (40 km/h).

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

266

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：３０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７１　

The TPMS can misinterpret the tirepressure because of differences inthe air temperatures. For example, ifyou check and fill your tires in awarm area, then drive in extremelycold weather, the tire pressure willbe lower than measured and couldbe underinflated and cause theTPMS indicators to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tires may become overinflated.However, the TPMS indicators willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when alltire pressures are normal.

302

303

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitor


Driving

267

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：３８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７２　

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losingpressure on the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.


268

Canadian modelU.S. model

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７３　

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’message and the tire pressurereadings are not displayed. If thishappens, you will first see a systemwarning message ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons,including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the low tire pressureindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message may also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after driving several miles(kilometers).

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).313

Changing a Tire with TPMS

TPMS System Failure


Driving

269

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７４　

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire, thelow tire pressure indicator stays on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer; attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.




Towing a Trailer

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Towing a Trailer

270

０６／０８／１８　２１：２３：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７５　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages on the multi-information display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 272....................Maintenance Minder . 273....................Maintenance Record . 279

..............................Fluid Locations . 281......Engine Compartment Covers . 282

........................Adding Engine Oil . 283.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 284

..............................Engine Coolant . 286....................Windshield Washers . 287

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 288........Manual Transmission Fluid . 290

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 291....................Power Steering Fluid . 292

.............................................Lights . 293................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 299

.....................................Floor Mats . 300.................................Wiper Blades . 300

...............................................Tires . 302...................Checking the Battery . 308

.............................Vehicle Storage . 309

355

Maintenance

Maintenance

271

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７６　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

272

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：１４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７７　

▲ ▼

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe multi-information display to showyou when you should have yourdealer perform engine oilreplacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then push and releasethe INFO ( / ) button repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life appears (seepage ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay according to this table:

72

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Indicator

Maintenance

273

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：２１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７８　

If the oil life is 15 to 6 percent, youwill see the message ‘‘SERVICEDUE SOON’’ along with allmaintenance items that are neededat oil change time (see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see themessage ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’with the same maintenance itemsyou saw when ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed. When yousee this message, have the indicatedmaintenance performed as soon aspossible.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will seethe message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’on the display. Immediately have theservice performed, and make sure toreset the display (see page ).275

278

Maintenance Minder

274

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２７９　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

All maintenance items displayed inthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for 10 seconds. The multi-information display will ask for aconfirmation.

If you are sure you want to resetthe display, press the SEL/RESET button to select ‘‘OK.’’

If you do not want to reset thedisplay, press the INFO ( / )button to select ‘‘Cancel.’’

1.

2.

3.

278

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator

Maintenance

275

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８０　

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Acura partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

276

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：４１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８１　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the multi-information display.

238

239

288

304

293

291

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

277

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：５０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８２　

＊

＊

＃

＃

－－

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

278

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

277

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher transmission temperatures.On vehicles with automatic transmission, thisrequires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regularly drive your vehicle underthese conditions, have the transmission fluidchanged at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under

20°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

０６／０８／１８　２１：２４：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８３　

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

279

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Acura maintenance journal.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８４　

Maintenance Record

280

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８５　

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

281

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(Manual Transmissiononly)

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：１３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８６　

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected byseveral covers. You may need toremove the covers when youperform some simple maintenancework.

Most of the covers can be removedsimply by pulling them straight up.

To remove the left or right cowlcover, push the tabs inward and pullthe cover straight up.

When reinstalling the covers, makesure the pins and tabs are in theirproper positions.

To remove the front bulkhead cover,first remove the five holding clipsusing a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Engine Compartment Covers

282

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

COWL COVERS BATTERY COVER

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：１９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８７　

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel (see page ). Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Honda motor oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API certification seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

238

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

283

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８８　

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

2.

1.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

284

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：３４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２８９　

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

3.

7.

8.

9.

5.

6.

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

285

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９０　

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

286

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２５：５１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９１　

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Add

coolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

If the fluid levelis low, a message will be shown onthe multi-information display.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

On Canadian models:

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

287

RADIATOR CAP

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９２　

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on, thenshut off the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 secondsbefore going to step 2, but don’twait longer than 90 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

288

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９３　

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the level between theupper and lower marks on thedipstick.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

5. 6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

289

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：１３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９４　

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove the checkbolt, and look for transmission fluidcoming out of the bolt hole. If a smallamount of fluid drips out of the bolthole, reinstall the check bolt.

Manual Transmission Fluid

290

DRAIN BOLT

FILLER BOLT

CHECK BOLT

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：１９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９５　

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly after removing theengine compartment rear cover (seepage ).Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

282

Manual Transmission only

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Clutch FluidBrake Fluid Brake System

Maintenance

291

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：２９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９６　

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold,and the engine compartment right-side cover is off (see page ). Thefluid should be between the UPPERLEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not,add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

282

Power Steering Fluid

292

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９７　

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover fromthe side you are working on bycarefully pulling the cover out.

If you are replacing the bulb onthe driver’s side, remove the airintake cover by removing the twofastener pins and pulling the coverout. Then remove the upper partof the air intake duct by pulling itstraight up.

The headlight bulbs are a type ofhigh voltage discharge tube. Highvoltage can remain in the circuiteven with the light switch off and thekey removed. Because of this, youshould not attempt to examine orchange a headlight bulb yourself. If aheadlight bulb fails, take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it replaced.

1.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming

Headlights

Replacing a Daytime RunningLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

293

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９８　

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

(Driver’s side)Install the upper part of the airintake duct.

(Driver’s side)Install the engine compartmentcorner cover, and secure it withtwo fastener pins.

Install the engine compartmentside cover.

Start the engine. If you arereplacing a driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe right. If you are replacing apassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Turn offthe engine.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

3.

1.

Replacing the Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

Lights

294

０６／０８／１８　２１：２６：５５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０２９９　

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing it in and turning itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theedge of the inner fender cover,and pull the inner fender coverback.

Push the inner fender cover inplace. Install the holding clips, andlock them in place by pushing ontheir center.

Start the engine. If you arereplacing a driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe right. If you are replacing apassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Turn offthe engine.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Maintenance

295

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３００　

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the trunk.Using a small screwdriver, pop upthe pin in the center of thefastener, then remove the fastener.Unscrew and remove the cargonet hook from the fender. Pullback the trunk lining.

Push the inner fender cover inplace. Install the holding clips, andlock them in place by pushing ontheir center.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theedge of the inner fender cover,and pull the inner fender coverback.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

Replacing the Rear Turn SignalBulb (in Fenders)

Lights

296

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０１　

Insert the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining, andpush in the head of the fastener.Screw the cargo net hook into thefender.

Determine which back-up lightis out (left or right), then openthe trunk.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1 a.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Back-up Light Bulb(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance

297

RIGHT STOP

CORNERFASTENER

LEFT STOP

TRUNK LIDINNERHANDLE

LEFT SIDE FASTENERCORNERFASTENER

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０２　

Pop up the pin in the center ofthe left or right corner fastenerwith a small screwdriver, andremove the fastener.

Remove the left sidefastener the same way.

Pull out the outside edge of therubber stop, then push the stopoutward, and pull it to remove it.

Remove the screw from thetrunk lid inner handle, andremove the handle trim.

Pull back the corner of thetrunk lid lining.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

c.

b.

2.

3.

d.

e.

Left sideonly:

Lights

298

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０３　

Insert the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.


Reinstall the trunk lid lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Install all removed parts.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater, or isopropyl alcohol.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

299

LOOP

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：３９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０４　

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

If you use non-Acura floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

The driver’s and right rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormats from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals(driver’s floor mat) or with the seatweight sensors (right rear floor mat).

1.

Floor Mats Wiper Blades

Floor Mats, Wiper Blades

300

FLOOR MAT ANCHORSDo not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０５　

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2. 3. 5.

4.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

301

LOCK TABBLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

０６／０８／１８　２１：２７：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０６　

＋

However, these tires are not suitablefor driving on snow or ice, so all-season or winter tires must beinstalled for winter drivingconditions.

See page for winter drivingconditions.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance all-season tires(marked All Season or M S on thesidewalls). These tires provideexcellent handling and brakingperformance in most drivingsituations.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information about your tires,how and when to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a high-traction compoundand tread pattern to provide superioracceleration, cornering, and stoppingunder most driving conditions.

307

Type S with summer tires

All models except Type S with summertires

Inflation Guidelines

Tire Types

Tires

302

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：０２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０７　

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeed.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

We strongly recommend that younot drive faster than posted speedlimits and conditions allow. If youever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot adjust the tire pressure,excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

266

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Cold Tire Pressure forHigh Speed Driving

Tire Size

CONTINUED

All Models

All Models except Type S

Type S

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Recommended Tire Pressures forHigh Speed Driving

Tires

Maintenance

303

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R17 93W

P235/45R17 93W235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93WP235/45R17 93W

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

39 psi (270 kPa ,2.7 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０８　

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthe tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressure.

If you check air pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

340

Tire Inspection

Tires

304

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：２７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３０９　

Your vehicle’s tires have wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe illustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

305

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１０　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theanti-lock brake and the vehiclestability assist systems to workinconsistently. Wheels:

Tires:

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

(All season tire)

(Summer tire)

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

306

17 x 8.0 JJ

P235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93W

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１１　

＋

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your dealer.

340

342

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Summer Tires

Winter Driving

Tires

Maintenance

307

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２８：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１２　

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Acura dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

308

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１３　

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

309

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：１０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１４　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 312....................Changing a Flat Tire . 313

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 318................................Jump Starting . 320

..............If the Engine Overheats . 322.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 324..........Charging System Indicator . 324

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 325...............Brake System Indicator . 326

..............................................Fuses . 327..............................Fuse Locations . 329

......................Emergency Towing . 331..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 332

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

311

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：１６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１６　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

Compact Spare Tire

312

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

(The Type S compact spare is shown.)

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１７　

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

313

TOOL CASE

JACKSPARE TIRE

TRUNK FLOOR

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：３３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１８　

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

6. 7. 8.


314

EXTENSIONWHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：４０　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３１９　

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

9. 10. 11.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

315

BRAKE HUB

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：４６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２０　

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt. Attach the wingbolt to the bolt extension over thespacer cone.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

12. 13.

16.

15.

14.


316

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

BOLTEXTENSION

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：５４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２１　

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in thecenter of the flat tire.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

17.

18.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

317

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０６／０８／１８　２１：２９：５９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２２　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in Park or neutral.

Check these things:

320

331

308

320

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

318

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２３　

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

63

247

327

331

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

319

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：１３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２４　

＋

＋

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (M/T) orPark (A/T), and set the parkingbrake.

1.

2.

3.

Jump Starting

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

320

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：２１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２５　

－

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromthe engine hanger on your vehicle,then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

7.

6.

5.

4.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

321

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：２８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２６　

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

331

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

322

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２７　

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark(see onpage ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximum.Add coolant to the radiator up tothe base of the filler neck. If youdo not have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

8.

9.

7.

11.

10.

6.

286

331

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

Adding Engine Coolant

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

323

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：４３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２８　

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

238

283

331

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

324

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３０：５２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３２９　

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message onthe multi-information display.Tighten the cap until it clicks at leastonce (see page ). Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

348236

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodeState

Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

325

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：００　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３０　

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

The brake system indicatornormally comes on whenyou turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, andas a reminder to check theparking brake. It will stayon if you do not fullyrelease the parking brake.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired byyour dealer as soon as possible (see

on page ).

291

331

Brake System Indicator

Emergency Towing

326

Canada

U.S.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３１　

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.Remove the cover from the fusebox.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes. The interior fusebox is on the driver’s lower left side.To remove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, pull ittoward you, and take it out of itshinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side next to the air cleanerhousing.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Remove the screws with aPhillips-head screwdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuses control that device. Checkthose fuses first, but check all thefuses before deciding that a blownfuse is the cause. Replace any blownfuses, and check if the device works.

1.

2.

3.

329 330

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

327

UNDER-HOODINTERIOR FUSE

BLOWN

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３２　

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

5.

6.

4.182

Fuses

328

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：２４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３３　

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.

12345

15 A30 A

7.5 A10 A7.5 A

Left Headlight Low BeamRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECUCondenser FanFog LightRadiator Fan MotorMG Clutch RelayHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack UP, ACCHazard WarningVSA Pump Motor RelayVSA Fail Safe RelayFI ECU (ECM/PCM)Power SeatHeater MotorBatteryIGI Main

15 A7.5 A15 A30 A10 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

120 A50 A

6789

1011121314151617181920212223

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

329

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０６／０８／１９　１１：２４：０４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３４　

No.

No. Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Amps.

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

7.5 A30 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A15 A15 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A30 A30 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

DBWIG1 CoilDaytime Running LightLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockAccessory Socket

IG1 OPDSIG1 WiperTPMS

Driver’s Power Seat (Slide)Seat HeaterDriver’s Power Seat (Recline)Passenger’s Power Seat (Slide)IG1 ACGIG1 Fuel PumpWasherMeterSRSIGPRear Left Power WindowRear Right Power WindowFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowMoonroofVBSOLHACOP2ACCHAC OP

15 A15 A15 A15 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A15 A

Passenger’s Power Seat (Recline)

Fuse Locations

330

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０６／０８／１９　１１：２４：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３５　

－

－

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switched in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock. Makesure the radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socket areturned off so they do not run downthe battery.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

331

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：４９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３６　

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

To use the towing hook:Remove the cover from the

bumper by pushing the lower partof the cover with your finger.

Remove the towing hook, hookextension, and wheel nut wrenchfrom the tool case in the spare tire.

Using the wheel nut wrench,fasten the extension into the bolthole.

3.

1.

2.331

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

332

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３１：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３７　

Screw the towing hook into thehook extension, and tighten itsecurely by hand.

4.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

333

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３２：０２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３３８　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 336................................Specifications . 338

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 340

.................................Treadwear . 340......................................Traction . 340

.............................Temperature . 341.................................Tire Labeling . 342

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Required Federal

............................Explanation . 343

.......................Emissions Controls . 345.....................The Clean Air Act . 345

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 345

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 345

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 345

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 346....................PGM-FI System . 346

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 346

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 346

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 346

....................Replacement Parts . 346..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 347

..............State Emissions Testing . 348

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

335

０６／０８／１８　２１：３２：０８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４０　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

336

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０６／０８／１９　１１：２４：１５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４１　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

337

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

０６／０８／１８　２１：３２：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４２　

－－

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

338

Capacities

Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Dimensions

189.3 in (4,809 mm)

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

7.9 US qt (7.5 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

2.2 US qt (2.1 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

2.17 US gal (8.2 )2.11 US gal (8.0 )

1.69 US gal (6.4 )1.72 US gal (6.5 )

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidManualtransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

8.1 US qt (7.7 )

62.0 in (1,576 mm)62.1 in (1,577 mm)107.9 in (2,740 mm)56.7 in (1,441 mm)75.4 in (1,916 mm)

Fuel tank

ND-OIL817.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

HFC-134a (R-134a)

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Length

WidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

189.8 in (4,822 mm)

Approx.

FrontRear

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehicleCanada Vehicle

Type S

Type S:

1 :

2 :3 :

1

2

3

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

０６／０９／２２　１０：１８：１８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４３　

－－

＊＊

＊

＊

－

－－

－－－－－－－－－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

339

Tires

Alignment

Engine

Battery

Fuses

Lights

3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine12 V 21 W/2.2 CP12 V 60 W (HB3)

12 V 35 W (HID)

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

235/45R17 93WP235/45R17 93W

3°17’1°00’0°30’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

11.0 : 1

195.9 cu-in (3,210 cm )

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratioSpark plugs

12 V

4 CP5 W2 CP5 W5 W3 CP21 CP

51 W (HB4)21 W

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

Capacity 12 V 72 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

12 V

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

Headlight(High beam/Low beam)DRLFront turn signal/parkinglightsFront Fog lightsRear turn signalBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsMap lights

See page 330 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 329 or the fuse boxcover.

T145/70R17 106MT135/80R16 101M

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

Front/Rear

Spare

Front

RearSpare

Summer tire1 :2 :

3 :All season tire Type S

Type S:

1

3

3

2

０６／０８／１８　２１：３２：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４４　

－The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

340

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：０５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４５　

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109 and No. 139.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

341

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：０９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN. TIN is located on the sidewallof the tire.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Date of manufacture.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

P

R

DOT

2202

17

235

45

93

W

OBGN

PVC

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

342

P235/45R17 93W

DOT OBGN PVC 2202

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：２４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４７　

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

343

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：３１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４８　

－

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

344

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：３６　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３４９　

＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are then

drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

345

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：４４　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５０　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions Controls

346

０６／０８／１８　２１：３３：５３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５１　

The three way catalytic convertercontains platinum, palladium, andrhodium. These metals serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

347

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERWARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：０１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５２　

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

348

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５３　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

State Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

349

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：１１　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５４　

....Customer Service Information . 352....................Warranty Coverages . 353

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 354

.....................Authorized Manuals . 355

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

351

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５６　

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Your dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraClient Services Office.

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

336

Customer Service Information

352

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：２５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５７　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2007 Acura warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2007 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

353

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：３５　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５８　

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Acura Automobile Division,American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

354

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：３９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３５９　

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００７

ＡＣＵ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

355

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61SEP03

61SEP03EL

61SEP30

31SEP630

31SEP800

31SEP930

31SEPQ30

ACU-R

Form Description

2007 Acura TL Service Manual

2007 Acura TL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004 Model Series Acura TL

Body Repair Manual

2007 Acura TL Owner’s Manual

2007 Acura TL Navigation Manual

2007 Acura TL

Maintenance Journal

2007 Acura TL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：４９　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６０　

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

356

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０６／０８／１８　２１：３４：５７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６１　

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 240................................Accessories . 240

............................Modifications . 241ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 95............Accessory Power Sockets . 120

......................................AcuraLink . 217................Adding Engine Coolant . 286

........................Adding Engine Oil . 283....................Additives, Engine Oil . 284

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 22...............Additional Information . 22

......................................Servicing . 31...................System Components . 22

..............Air Conditioning System . 126.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 303

......................................Antifreeze . 286Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 60, 262...................................Operation . 262

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 182.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 95

................................Audio System . 133...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 88

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 20.............Automatic Speed Control . 184..............Automatic Transmission . 253

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 338...............Checking Fluid Level . 288

.......................................Shifting . 253.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 253

.......................................Shifting . 253....................Shift Lock Release . 258

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 59, 324............................Jump Starting . 320

..............................Maintenance . 308............................Specifications . 339

..............................Before Driving . 233....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

...........................Beverage Holder . 120Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 262.............Break-in, New Linings . 234

...........................................Fluid . 291.......................................Parking . 117

.................System Indicator . 59, 326........................Wear Indicators . 261

.............................Braking System . 261.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 234

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 89........................Brights, Headlights . 86

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 297

.........Daytime Running Lights . 293.................................Fog Lights . 295

............................Specifications . 339............Turn Signal Lights . 294, 296

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 293

............................Capacities Chart . 338.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

............................Carrying, Cargo . 243Cassette Player

....................................Care . 154, 175...........................Operation . 152, 173

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..................................Ceiling Light . 118

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：０３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６２　

＊

＊

＊

........................Certification Label . 336...................................Chains, tires . 307

Changing Oil........................................How to . 284......................................When to . 273

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 313...Charging System Indicator . 59, 324

............Checklist, Before Driving . 246..................Childproof Door Locks . 98

.....................................Child Safety . 33..............................Booster Seats . 49

...................................Child Seats . 41..........................................Infants . 38

............................Large Children . 48.........................................LATCH . 43

......................Risks with Airbags . 34.............................Small Children . 39

.........................................Tethers . 46.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 34

Cleaning...................................Seat Belts . 299

...............Climate Control System . 131..............................................Clock . 116

..........................CO in the Exhaust . 52.......................Compact Spare tire . 312

.........................................Compass . 228

.................Console Compartment . 121...............Consumer Information . 352

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 286....................................Checking . 239

.........................Proper Solution . 286...................Temperature Gauge . 65

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 345

................Cruise Control Indicator . 61............Cruise Control Operation . 184

...................................Cup Holders . 120..........Customer Relations Office . 352

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 3, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 88.Daytime Running Light Indicator . 62

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 354................Defogger, Rear Window . 90..............Defrosting the Windows . 130

....................................Dimensions . 338...............Dimming the Headlights . 86

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 288

..................................Engine Oil . 238..........................Directional Signals . 86

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 261........................Disc Changer . 145, 165

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 176.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 285

Doors.......................Monitor Indicator . 68......................Power Door Locks . 96

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 340...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 245....................................Economy . 239

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 108

..............................Economy, Fuel . 239............Emergencies on the Road . 311.............Battery, Jump Starting . 320...........Brake System Indicator . 326

................Changing a Flat Tire . 313.....Charging System Indicator . 324

Index

D

E

II

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：０７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６３　

CONTINUED

..................Checking the Fuses . 327.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 90......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 332

............................Jump Starting . 320.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 324...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 325

..................Overheated Engine . 322.......................................Towing . 331

.........................Emergency Brake . 117......................Emergency Flashers . 90

......................Emergency Towing . 331............Emergency Trunk Opener . 98

.......................Emissions Controls . 345.............Emissions Testing, State . 348

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 59, 325.........................................Oil Life . 72

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 59, 324

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 283...............................Overheating . 322

............................Specifications . 338

....................Speed Limiter . 251, 258..............................Starting . 247, 248

.................Engine, if it won’t start . 318

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 235.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 345

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 16

...................................Fan, Interior . 128Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 125....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 235

........................................Filter, Oil . 284.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 90

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 313.....................................Floor Mats . 300

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 288

..........................................Brake . 291.........................................Clutch . 291

..............Manual Transmission . 290..........................Power Steering . 292

................Windshield Washers . 287FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 178........................................Fog Lights . 89

..........................Four-way Flashers . 90..............................Front Airbags . 9, 24

....................................Front Seats . 103

....................................Adjusting . 103.......................................Heaters . 111.....................................Airbags . 9, 24

.................................................Fuel . 234......................Fill Door and Cap . 235

...........................................Gauge . 65................Octane Requirement . 234

........................Reserve Indicator . 63........................Tank, Filling the . 235

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 327

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 239.........................................Gasoline . 234

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63...........................................Gauge . 65

................Octane Requirement . 234........................Tank, Filling the . 235

................Gas Station Procedures . 235

Index

F

G

IND

EX

III

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：１２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６４　

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65

...............................................Fuel . 65...............................Speedometer . 65

.................................Tachometer . 65Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 2536-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 250......................................Glove Box . 121

.......................Halogen Fog Bulbs . 295................HandsFree Link (HFL) . 190

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 90........................................Headlights . 86

........................................Aiming . 293Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 88............Daytime Running Lights . 88

..................High Beam Indicator . 62.........................Reminder Chime . 86

...................................Turning on . 86............................Head Restraints . 104

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 86

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 187

.......................Hood, Opening the . 237

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 336Ignition

..............................................Keys . 92...........................................Switch . 95

............Timing Control System . 346........................Immobilizer System . 94

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........................................Indicators . 58

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 60, 262Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 59, 326................Charging System . 59, 324

.............................Cruise Control . 61DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 62.....................................Fog Light . 63...................................High Beam . 62

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63......................................Low Fuel . 63

................Low Oil Pressure . 59, 324

.....................Side Airbag Off . 30, 60.........................................SRS . 29, 60

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 62

............................VSA Activation . 61.................................VSA System . 61...............................Infant Restraint . 38

......................................Infant Seats . 38..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 302.................................Inside Mirror . 106

.............................Inspection, Tire . 304............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 89

...............................Interior Lights . 118........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 314.......................................Jack, Tire . 313

................................Jump Starting . 320

Index

H

I

J

IV

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：１７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６５　

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 92...............Keyless Memory Setting . 76

.......................Label, Certification . 336.................Lane Change, Signaling . 86

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 19Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 293.......................................Indicator . 58

.........................................Parking . 86..................................Turn Signal . 86

.....................................Load Limit . 243......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 95

........................Lockout Prevention . 96Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 95..................................Glove Box . 121

.................................Power Door . 96...........................................Trunk . 97

........................Low Coolant Level . 239...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 59, 324

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 338

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 243

..................................Maintenance . 271........................................Minder . 273

...Owner Maintenance Checks . 277........................................Record . 279

..........................................Safety . 272Malfunction Indicator

....................................Lamp . 59, 325...................Manual Transmission . 250

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 290...........Memory, Driving Position . 108

...............................Meters, Gauges . 65........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 241.......................................Moonroof . 116

.............Multi-Information Display . 66............................Engine Oil Life . 72...........................HandsFreeLink . 73

.........Keyless Memory Settings . 76................Maintenance Minder . 273

.....................................Odometer . 70.................Outside Temperature . 71

............................Trip Computer . 73

...................................Trip Meter . 70

...................Neutral Gear Position . 254..................New Vehicle Break-in . 234

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 336

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 234.........................................Odometer . 70

...............................Odometer, Trip . 70Oil

........................Change, How to . 284......................Change, When to . 273......................Checking Engine . 238..............Pressure Indicator . 51, 324

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 283

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 95Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 345

Index

L

N

O

M

K

IND

EX

V

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：２３　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６６　

＊

............................Outside Mirrors . 106.....................Outside Temperature . 71

....................Overheating, Engine . 322....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 277

..............Panel Brightness Control . 89........................Park Gear Position . 254

...........................................Parking . 260...............................Parking Brake . 117

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 59, 326

.................................Parking Lights . 86..Parking Over Things that Burn . 260....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 30

.............................PGM-FI System . 346...............Power Socket Locations . 120

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 33

Installing a Child Seat Using........................................Latch . 43

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 46

.................Selecting a Child Seat . 41.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.......Protecting Larger Children . 48.........Protecting Small Children . 39

..................Protecting Your Discs . 177

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 354

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 13

.......................................Seat Belts . 8..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 12

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53...............................Safety Messages . ii

.......................Satellite Radio . 139, 159

...................Radiator Overheating . 322Radio/Cassette/Disc Sound

........................................System . 133...................Readiness Codes . 325, 348

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 296........................Rear Seat Armrest . 104

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 231..........................Rear View Mirror . 106

.................Rear Window Defogger . 90.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 103

.............................Reminder Lights . 58................Remote Audio Controls . 181

.......................Remote Transmitter . 99

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 284

..........................................Fuses . 327................................Light Bulbs . 293

...........................................Tires . 306.............................Wiper Blades . 300

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 21

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 239.........................Restraint, Child . 38, 39

..................Reverse Gear Position . 254................................Rotation, Tire . 305

Index

P

R

S

VI

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：３２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６７　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

.....................................Cleaning . 299......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

................................Maintenance . 21Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 18, 58...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16..................................Seat Heaters . 111

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 103............................Security System . 183

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 255...............................Serial Number . 336

...........................Service Intervals . 273

...........................Service Manual . 355.........Service Station Procedures . 235

..........................Setting the Clock . 116.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 253

........................Shift Lock Release . 258...................................Shifting . 250, 253

................................Side Airbags . 9, 27........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 30, 60

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 29...............................Signaling Turns . 86

.....................................Snow Tires . 307

................................Sound System . 133Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 312............................Specifications . 339

....................Specifications Charts . 338................................Speed Control . 184

..........SRS, Additional Information . 37...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

....................Airbag Components . 22.............................Airbag Service . 31

How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 29

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 60

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 95..............Starting the Engine . 247, 248

................With a Dead Battery . 320..............State Emissions Testing . 348

........Steam Coming from Engine . 322Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 91.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 95

...................Stereo Sound System . 133....................Storing Your Vehicle . 309

........................Sunglasses Holder . 122....Supplemental Restraint System . 22

......................................Servicing . 31...............................SRS Indicator . 29

...................System Components . 22

.....................................Tachometer . 65.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 311

...........................Tape Player . 152, 173Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 340.....Emissions Control Systems . 345

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 347

.......................Temperature Gauge . 65....................Temperature, Outside . 71

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 132..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 347..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 91

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：３７　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６８　

＊

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 311

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 340

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 234.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 285

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 243......................Vehicle Dimensions . 338

....Vehicle Identification Number . 336Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 264........VSA System Indicator . 61, 264

...VSA Activation Indicator . 61, 264.........................VSA Off Switch . 265

.............................Vehicle Storage . 309.................................................VIN . 336

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 283

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

..................Warranty Coverages . 353Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 287.....................................Operation . 85

..........................Time, Setting the . 116....................................Tire Chains . 307

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 313Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................................System . 266Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 64, 266.....TPMS System Indicator . 68, 269

..............TPMS System Failure . 269Tire Pressure Monitoring System

...................................Messages . 268...............................................Tires . 302

..............................Air Pressure . 303.........................Checking Wear . 304..........................Compact Spare . 312

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 340......................................Inflation . 303

..................................Inspection . 304...................................Replacing . 306

......................................Rotating . 305...........................................Snow . 307

............................Specifications . 339.............................Summer Tire . 307

.......................Traction Devices . 307..........................Winter Driving . 307

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 313

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 270

................Emergency Wrecker . 331...........................Traction Devices . 307

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 288.Checking Fluid Level Manual . 290

..................Fluid Selection . 288, 290..............Identification Number . 336.............Shifting the Automatic . 253

..................Shifting the Manual . 250.....................................Treadwear . 340

................................Trip Computer . 73.......................................Trip Meter . 70

................................................Trunk . 97........Emergency Trunk Release . 98

.................................Opening the . 97...................Open Monitor Light . 68

....................................Turn Signals . 86

Index

U

V

W

VIII

０６／０８／１９　１７：３１：４２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３６９　

＊Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 91............Alignment and Balance . 305

..........................Compact Spare . 312Windows

................Operating the Power . 112...........................Rear, Defogger . 90

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 85...................................Defroster . 130

.....................................Washers . 287Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 300.....................................Operation . 85

....................................Worn Tires . 304.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 331

................XM Satellite Radio . 139, 159

U.S.:

Index

X

IND

EX

IX

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：４２　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３７０　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Service SJ ‘‘EnergyConserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Front:33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )Rear:

Front:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

283

288

290

292

291

All models except Type S

Type S17.1 US gal (64.7 )

０６／０８／１８　２１：３５：５８　３１ＳＥＰ６３０　０３７１　

2007 acura tl online reference owner's...

Documents